-------

-------

-------

-------

-------
                                 CONTENTS
Abstract	   iii
Figures	   vi
Tables	vii
Acknowledgment 	 viii

     1.  Introduction   	     1
              Purpose   	     1
              Users of  this document	     2
              Organization of the report 	     3
     2.  Indoor Air Quality Research  	 	     5
              Historical summary  	     5
              Ongoing research  	     6
              References used in  Section 2	   12
     3.  Indoor Air Quality	   13
              Pollutants	   13
              Factors that affect indoor ai11 quality 	   20
              Review publications   	   24
              Reference	   26
     4.  Measurement Systems  	   27
              Definitions	   27
              Instruments and methods   	   29
              Key references  and  other  information sources 	   36
     5.  Design Considerations  	   38
              Design considerations for investigating building-
                associated problems   .....  	   39
              Methodology for the development of monitoring  .....   40
              Probe placement	   55
              Additional reading  	   57
              References	   57
     6.  Data Reporting	   59
              Level I Reporting:  Meeting objectives of
                specific studies	   59
              Level II  Reporting    Preserving data for use in	
                other studies	   60
     7.  Quality Assurance and  Quality Control  , 	   64
              Elements  of a quality assurance plan	   64
              Examples  of qual'ty assurance plans  	   67

                                                                (continued)

-------
                            CONTENTS (concluded)
Appendixes
     A.  Summaries of instrunents  	   69
              Introduction 	   69
              Instruments  	   69
                   Asbestos and other fibrous aerosols 	   70
                   Biological aerosols 	   73
                   Carbon monoxide 	   80
                   Formaldehyde  	   98
                   Inhalable participate natter	112
                   Nitrogen dioxide  	  137
                   Ozone"	153
                   Radon/radon progeny 	  156
                   Sulfur dioxide  	  186
                   Data logging	195
              EPA reference and equivalent methods 	 ....  205
              Glossary of instrument terns 	 ....  205

     B.  Alternatives to comnercially available instrumention:
           standard and accepted methods 	  212
              Introduction 	  212
              Air exchange	213
              Inhalable particulate matter 	  223
              Orpam'c pollutants	232
              Formaldehyde 	  239
              Radon	241
              Fibrous aerosols 	  245
                                     -vi -

-------
                                  FIGURES


Number                                                                  Page

  1  Various aspects of indoor air quality studied during the
       past 15 years	       7

  2  Schematic flow chart for development of design  	      41

  3  Worksheet for first-level screening of instrument selection .  .      51

  4  Worksheet for second-level  screening of instrument selection  .      53

  5  Format far reporting key factors of an indoor air qur.lity
       study and its design	      61

  6  Format for Deporting scope of data collection and storage ...      62
                                     -vn -

-------
                                   TABLES


Number                                                                  Page

  1  A partial  summary of ongoing research related to indoor
       ai r quality	       8

  2  Sources and exposure guidelines of indoor air contaminants  .  .      14

  3  Types of available measurement system categories by pollutant   .     30

  4  Summary of selected pollutant concentration measurement systems      31

  5  Estimated a and J3 levels associated with selected sample sizes
       and assumed differences between Yi and Y? . .  . ,	      49
                                     -vm-

-------
                             ACKNOWLEDGMENT


     This work was funded by the U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency
(EPA) under Contract Number 63-02-3679 to Research Triangle Institute
(RTI) and by RTI Subcontract Number 1-31U-2190 to GEOMET Technologies,
Inc.

     We sincerely appreciate the guidance provided by EPA Project Officers
Lpnce Wallace and Eugene Harris and the cooperation  of Edo Pellizzari of
RTI.  David Berg of EPA loresaw the need for the guidelines and provided
early support and encouragement in initiating this work.

     In addition to the persons named above, many others reviewed drafts
of this document.  They are Gerald Akiand, Robert Allen, Annon Birenzvige,
Bill Furlong, Gary Furmen, Gerald Gardetca, John Girrian, Thad Godish, David
Grimsrud, Joseph Hens, David Harris, David Harrje, Robert Johnson, Mike
Koontz, Brian Krafthefer, Brian Leaderer, Denetrios  Moscnandreas,  Robert
iiininner, Francis Offermann III, Thomas Phillips, Fredrick Shair,  Samuel
Silberstein, John Spongier, William Turner, James Woods, and John Yocom.
Joe Zabransky assisted in preparing an earlier version of this document, and
Mike Koontz prepared the subsection on determining the sample size.

     To all these people and their organizations, we express gratitude for
their interest, time, and efrort.  In many cases, these people served as
contacts for reviews of tne draft, within their organizations.  We thank
all those who helped us with the review process.

     We also want to acknowledge the assistance provided by the companies
whose products are reviewed in this document.

     GEOMET's Publication Department, under the able direction of Leonora
Simon, provided word processing and editorial  support; the editorial
assistance of Jo Ann Koffman deserves a special mention.
                                     Niren Nagda and Harry Rector

-------
                                 SECTION 1

                               INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE

     The design of an indoor air quality monitoring program must include
considerations not generally required for outdoor monitoring.   First,  the
factors that affect indoor air quality can differ, or at least differ  in
significance, from those that affect outdoor air quality.  For example,
indoor sources such as (.invented gas appli'-ices have little or no effect  on
the outdoor air, and the chemical decay of ozone occurs more readily indoors
than outdoors.  Similarly, although the rate of air exchange between indoors
and outdoors through the building envelope has an important effect on  indoor
air quality, this factor is not important in measuring outdoor air quality.
Second, some instruments and measurement methods used to quantify outdoor air
quality nay not be appropriate for monitoring indoor air quality.

     This document offers guidelines to help users design and develop  indoor
air ruality measurement programs.  The guidelines apply to nonindustrial
indoor environments such as residences, office buildings, schools, retail
establishments, and indoor recreational areas.  The information provided
should assist users in developing monitoring programs for meeting a variety
of objectives; examples of typical  objectives are given below:

     •    Characterization of pollutant levels and assessment of
          responsible "factors.  Monitoring programs are conducted to
          characterize Tevel s of indoor pollutants and to examine
          factors responsible for those levels.   This examination of
          factors can be somewhat qualitative and exploratory,  or it
          can include quantitative assessment and modeling.  An
          example of such a program is monitoring formaldehyde
          concentrations and examining the dependency of concentra-
          tion on temperature and structure age.  Another example is
          monitoring various pollutants in selected indoor structures
          and developing mathematical  models for relating the
          variation in concentrations  to time, rate of air exchange,
          and other parameters.

     e    Evaluation of impact on indoor air quality.  These
          monitoring programs usually  involve "before and after"
          measurements  used to evaluate the impact of various
          measures designed to conserve energy or alter indoor air
          quality.  Examples of such measures 'include retrofitting
          to conserve energy or using  devices to improve indoor air
              i ty.

-------
     e    Exposure assessment.  Many individual? spend about
          ~?U T>erce ntT~oTHtFeTr time indoors.  Thus, monitoring
          indoor air quality is useful for assessing hunan
          exposure to pollutants.  Monitoring data from such
          studies can also be useful in comparing the indoor
          contribution of a pollutant with the total exposure
          and in research to assess health effects.

     To a nore limited extent, the information in this document will  also
aid in investigating indoor air quality problems and building-related
illnesses.  However, this latter area of research is complex and has  been
investigated mostly through case studies, rather than through a predesigned
research program.  Suqnested solutions or procedures are limited by the
current state of the art.

     Information presented in this document can help the user to design
one component of health-effect studies—namely measurement of pollutant
levels.  Health-effect-based standards are provided but discussion of the
health effects of indoor pollutants are not within the scope of these guide-
lines.  Similarly, this document does not address the design of studies
involving chambers and other specialized sampling conditions.

USERS OF THIS DOCUMENT

     This document is primarily aimed at users who seek to characterize
indoor air quality and the related parameters.  These persons may include air
pollution soecialists; building energy conservation specialists; health
department personnel; heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC)
enqineers; and undergraduate and graduate students in these and related
fields.  The guidelines are prepared primarily for those with some knowledge
of air pollution monitoring or operation and analysis of building HVAC
systems, but with no indoor monitoring experience.  Yot parts of the  document
will  be of use to those who are knowledgeable in indoor air quality research.
With the aid of this document, users can accomplish the following:

     e    Develop study design option:

     e    Develop a monitoring design

     e    Choose from a wide variety of instrumentation and measure-
          ment methods tailored to the monitoring objectives

     9    Use generally accepted quality assurance and quality
          control principles

     e    Expand the utility of data collected.

-------
ORGANIZATION OF THE REPORT

     This document addresses a variety of topics, which are listed below.
For readers who are unfamiliar with indoor air quality, d study of Sections 2
through 5 is suggested as a first step.  These users can then focus on spe-
cific instrumentation, data reporting, and quality assurance needs presented
in Appendices A and B and in Sections 6 and 7.  Those familiar with indoor
air quality research can begin with Section 4 and review the instrumentation
and methods before referring to Sections 5 and 6.  To those who are experts
in indoor air quality research, Appendixes A and I! may serve as a useful
resource.

Section ?--Indoor Air Quality Research

     A historical perspective will familiarize the reader with research
conducted in the field of indoor air quality.  Ongoing research projects  are
also listed.

Section 3--Pollutants and Other Factors Affecting Indoor Air Quality

     Thirteen pollutants or pollutant groups and their indoor sources are
summarized.  A generalized mass balance model relates various factors
affecting indoor concentrations; an example illustrates the use of the model.
Publications describing different aspects of indoor air quality research  are
high!iqhted.

Section 4—Measurement Systems

     This section discusses measurement and instrumentation characteristics,
operating principles, and sources of information.  Instrumentation and
methods for measuring pollutant concentrations and air exchange rates are
summarized.

Section 5--Design Considerations

     A discussion of various design considerations,  including selection of
parameters, determination of sample size, and selection of a measurement
system, will help the user systematically develop a monitoring program.
Helpful hints on such specifics as probe placement are given,  and feedback
and iterative procedures for developing a design are emphasized.   Approaches
for addressing building-associated indoor quality problems are discussed.

Section 6--Data Reporting

     Guidelines for data reporting will enable users and study investigators
to understand the descriptors required to make useful data sets accessible to
other users.  Formats for reporting the scope and content of data are included

-------
Section 7--Quality Assurance and Quality Control
     Quality assurance (QA) and quality control  (QC) considerations,  with
references, are discussed.

Appendix A

     This appendix categorizes and reviews commercial  instruments suitable
for measuring indoor air quality.

Appendix B

     Standard or accepted methods can be used for certain measurements when
no off-the-shelf, commercial instrumentation is  available.   In some cases,
these methods can serve as alternatives to the instrumentation summarized in
Appendix A.  Appendix B summarizes these methods.

-------
                                 SECTION 2

                        INDOOR AIR QUALITY RESEARCH


     This section provides a brief overview of past  and ongoing  indoor  air
quality research.  In the case of past research,  the section  provides  the
reader with a historical perspective rather than  an  exhaustive  review.
A list of some of the ongoing research projects is also included.

HISTORICAL SUMMARY

     The first major studies of indoor air quality,  conducted in  Europe  and
the United States in the mid-1960s and early 1970s,  measured  indoor  concen-
trations of outdoor po1lutants.  Among the pollutants studied were total
suspended particles (TSP), sulfur dioxide (SCg),  and carbon monoxide (CO)
(Bierstcker, DeGraaf, and Mass 1965; Yocorn, Cfink, and Cote 1971).   These
early studies, as well as more recent efforts, demonstrated that  indoor
levels of an outdoor pollutant are affected both  by  outdoor levels and  by
indoor generation or removal.  For example, indoor concentrations of CO  are
dependent on outdoor levels and on the extent of  emissions  from  unvented
combustion appliances within a structure.  On the other hand, in  the absence
of indoor sources, a pollutant such as ozone (03) can rapidly decay  indoors.
Because of the importance of i-ndoor generation and decay,  indoor  air quality
research quickly expanded to address indoor sources  (Cote,  Wade,  and Yocom
1974) and sinks  (Spedding and Rowland 1970).

     Although early indoor monitoring studies focused on pollutants  governed
by ambient air quality standards, the monitoring  of  contaminants  primarily
present indoors  also began about the same time.  For example, an  early  study
to quantify indoor levels of radon (Rn)  was undertaken for  the U.S.  Atomic
Energy Commission in the late 1960s and  early 1970s  (Lowder et al. 1971).
Studies in Denmark in the early 1970 (Anderson, Lundquist,  and Molhave  1974)
also identified  formaldehyde (HCHO) as an indoor  Contaminant.

     Infiltration of outside air into a  building  envelope  influences indoor
concentrations.  Due to difficulties in  predicting air infiltration, it  has
been measured experimentally by employing tracer  gas techniques.   Initially,
air infiltration studies focused on the  relation  to  energy  consumption,
because air infiltration is an important component of the  the heating  and
cooling loads of buildings.  Since the early 1970s,  air infiltration has been
included as an important facet of indoor air quality monitoring  in many
studies (Drivas, Simmonds, and Shair 1972).

     In early research, the ratio of indoor to outdoor concentrations  of some
pollutants was thought to be useful in predicting indoor concentrations
(Yocom, Clink, and Cote 1971).  In the mid-1970s  this ratio -was  replaced by  a
more fundamental mass balance approach (Shair and Heitner  1974).   The  mass
balance modeling approach, simple in concept, was adapted  from odor  modeling  in

-------
industrial hygiene (Turk 1963).  In the mass balance approach,  described in
Section 3, all factors that have an impact on indoor concentration of
pollutants, such as rate of indoor generation, are considered in estimating
pollutant concentration.  In addition to improving predictive capabilities,
the moss balance model permits a better understanding of the relation between
the various parameters influencing indoor air quality.

     The miniaturization of monitoring equipment, which permits pollutant
measurements with devices that are readily portable or attachable to clothing,
started in the mid-1970s (EPA 1979).  In the last 2 to 3 years, the develop-
ment of such devices has accelerated, and the current state of  the art in
personal monitoring compares favorcbly to the technology of larger, station-
ary monitoring equipment.  The advent of personal monitoring has encouraged
research on total human exposure that includes measurements at  home, at work,
outdoors, while commuting, and during other normal daily activities.

     Exposure synthesis studies began in 1975 (Fugas 1975).  These studies
focus on "time budgets," or time spent by population subgroups  in various
locations.  These locations, such as home, work,  or travel, are called
microenvironments.  To synthesize exposure, the data on small,  well-
characterized ranges of concentrations in a -microenvironment can be combined
with the time spent in that microenvironment.

     Field studies to define actual exposure have been recently initiated.
These studies use personal sampling devices and activity logs completed by
participants to determine total exposure in the various microenvironments.

     Figure 1 depicts the changing emphasis of indoor air quality research.

ONGOING RESEARCH

     Table 1 summarizes ongoing research and .shows areas of current research
emphasis.  The table, although not comprehensive, includes many of the
typical projects undertaken in the United States  in the early 1980s.  The
projects cover a range of pollutants.  In addition to those already named,
the pollutants include nitrogen dioxide (M02), inhalable particulates (IP),
HCHO, Rn, and S02-  Other studies encompass allergens,  volatile organics,
and depletion of oxygen (02).

     Government Agencies sponsor the majority of studies.  The  Agencies
include the EPA, the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), the Consumer Product
Safety Commission (CPSCK the National Institute of Environmental Health
Sciences  (N'lEHS), the Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA), the Bonneville
Power Administration  (BPA), and New York Energy Research and Development
Administration (NYERDA).

-------
     1%7                                    1972                                    1977                                    1932








                                    Indoor/outdoor relationship and indoor pollutant characterization



                                                                              Indoor emission  studies



                                     Sinks



                                                                           Indoor air quality  modeling



                                                                          Air exchange measurements



                                                                                             Use  of  personal  monitors



                                                                                                    Total  exposure  field  studies


Legend:
	  Related research
	  Specific-area research
                          Figure 1.  Various aspects of indoor air quality studied during the  past 15 years

-------
                  TABLE  1.   A  PARTIAL  SUMMARY  OF ONGOING RESEARCH  RELATED TO  INDOOR AIR QUALITY
Area/brief ti'tlp

Characterization jnu
 ~Mo~fTeTfnn
    Pollutants
                         ctudy frame
                          Sponsori ng
                         organizat'on
    Principal
  investigator*
Office builr'inqs, homes
for elderly, and
schools
Organics
Phase  I.   1 building
           each
Phase II:   2 buildings
           each
                         CPA
Phase I:
E.  Pellizzari, RTI
Phase II:   not
selected
Air transport within
b'jil dinas
Monitoring and
modeling of energy
use, infiltration, and
indoor air quality
Pollutants in
residential air

Residential and
commercial indo' air
quality


Effects of residential
woodburning appliances
on indoor air quality
Assessment of natural
Rn and Rn proqeny in
U.-S. single-family
houses
Measurement of annual
indoor and outdoor
222Rn and its
relationship to
environmental variables
Studies of Rn in
buildings

Residential ventilction



Influence of building
design and other factors
on indoor air qual ity
Emissions
Emission from unvented
combustion sources; from
tobacco combustion; and
occupancy anl tobacco
odor


Rn progeny

CO, N02, IP,
Rn and Rn progeny,
HCHC

CO, N02, HCHO,
particulates,
volatile vapors
Rn, N02, HCHO,
RSP, CO



CO, CO?, N02>
particulates

Rn and Rn
progeny


Rn




Rn


Rn, Hi~HO, CO,
N02


CO, N02, S02,
03, RSP, HCHO


N02, CO, S02,
C02, 02
depletion;
particulates,
odor, CO, trace
elements, organics;
occupancy odor
3-compartment
chamber
2 identical
houses


40 homes


40 homes for
passive monitor-
ing of oollutants;
2 homes subset for
real -time
Test homes


40 representative
homes


Indoor/outdoor;
detailed, long-term
correlation for a
small number of
homes
140 homes


3 pairs of homes, to
assess heat exchanger,
weatherization, and
occupancy
4 homes



Chamber






DOE

EPRI



CPSC


Niagara
Mohawk/
NYERDA


TVA/BPA


DOE



DOE




DOE


Pacific Power
& Light/
Battell e
Northwest
NSF



NIEHS






D. Grimsrud,
A. Nero, LBL
N.L. Nagda,
GEOMET


T.G. Matthews,
Oak Ridge National
Laboratory
R. O'Neil , Niagara
Mohawk



J. Harper, TVA


0. Rundo,
Argonne National
Laboratory

N. Harley, New
York University



B. Cohen,
University of
Pittsburgh
D. Zerba, Pacific
Power & Light


C. Davidson,
Carnegie Mellon


O.A.J. Stolwijk,
B.P. Leaderer,
W.S. Cain;
John B. Pierco
Foundation/Yale
University

                                                                                                       (continued)
* Addresses of principal  investigators  appear  at  the  end  of  Table  1.

-------
                                               TABLE 1.  (continued)
Arej/brief title
Emission factors for
several indoor sources
Characterization of
emissions from unvented
gas stoves, wood stoves,
and kerosene heaters
Building materials
Characterization of
emissions fron unvented
Pollutants Study frame
N02, CO, 502, Chamber
C02, 02
depl etion
CO, N02, Research house
S02
Orqanics Chamber
All Chamber
Sponsoring
organization
NIEHS
DOE and
CPSC
DOE
GRI
Pri ncipal
investigator*
J.A.J. Stolwijk,
E.P. Leaderer;
John B. Pierce
Foundation/Yale
University
D. Grimsrud,
A. Nero, LBL
D. Grimsrud,
A. Nero, LBL
D. Moschandreas,
;ITRI
gas appliances, wood-
burning devices,
kerosene heaters,
cor!; ing, and cigarette
smok. i ng

Emissions from kerosene
heaters

Formaldehyde content in
various preserved wood
products suppli sd by
manufacturers
CO, C02, U02,
S02

HCHO
                     Chamber                  CPSC
                     Chemical  analysis         CPSC
                     of wood products
                                          W.  Porter,  CPSC
                                          T.G.  Matthews,
                                          Oak  Ridge  national
                                          Laboratory
Controls (Including
  Ventilation)

Pollutant-specific
removal techniques

Behavior of heat
exchangers
Rn, Rn progeny,
part'rulates

None
3-compartment
chamber

Chamber
                                              DOE
                                              DOE
                                              EPA,  BPA
D.  Grimsrud,
A.  Hero, LBL

D.  Grimsrud,
A.  Nero, LBL
Instrumentation

Development and field
evaluation of passive
samplers

Assessment of radioactive
and chemically active air
contaminants
HCHO, CO,
particulates
Rn, Rn progeny
Laboratory
                                              DOE
Develop calibration      DOE
facility,  instrumenta-
tion, ana  methods for
residential  and
pjblic building
sampling
D. Grimsrud,
A. Nero, LBL
E. Knutson, DOE
                                                                                                      (continued)
  Addresses of principal  investigators appear at the end of Table 1.

-------
                                                TABLE" 1.  (concluded)
Area/brief tift
Pollutants
Sponsoring
Study frame organization
Principal
investigator*
Exposure Studies
24-hour exposure of
residents of Washington,
D.C.,  and Denver

24-hour exposure of
residents of chemical -
industrial cities

Total  exposure to
emissions of unvented
gas appliances

Characterization of
24-hour exposure of
three population
subgroi'ps

Assessing exposures and
adverse health effects
associated with alterna-
tive heat sources in
residences

Pol'utants, aero-
alle~genj, and respir-
atory diseases
CO
18 volatile
organic!


CO, N02
CO
N02, CO, C02,
.-02, HCHO,
0? depletion
TSP, kSP. 03,
CO, N02, pollen
Laci111, fungi,
algae
1,000 person-
days in each
location

bOO person-days
in two major
industrial  areas

Large multi-
pollutant  field
study

200 person-days
Field study
200 homes in
4 geographic
clusters
                                              FPA
EPA
GRI
                                              EPRI
NIEHS/CPSC
                                             EPA
                 T. Hartwell,  RT1;
                 T. Wey, PEDCo
                 E. Pellizzari,
                 RTI
                 J. Spengler,
                 Harvard
                                                              N.L. Hagda, GEOMET
J.A.J. Stolwijk,
B.P. Leaderer;
John B. Pierce
Foundation/Yale
University

M.D. Lebowitz,
University of Arizona
Data Evaluation

Evaluati'n of indoor        All
air quality data for
making r:sk assessments

Evaluation of risk of       Pn and Rn
exposure to Rn for          progeny
derign of epidemio-
logical  studies
                     Data  from  past
                     studies
                     Data  from  past
                     studies
                                             EPRI
                        DOE
                 J.  Yocom,  TRC;
                 J.  Spengler,
                 Harvard

                 A.  Uero,
                 D.  Grimsrud,
                 LBL
  Addresses and phone numbers:

      Argonne national laboratory, Argonne, IL 60439,  (312)  972-4168.
      Carnegie Mellon University, Pittsburgh,  PA 15213,  (412)  578-2951.
      GEOMET Technologies, Inc., 1801 Research E^ulevard,  Rockville, HD  20850,  (301) 424-9133.
      Harvard School of Public Health, 665 H;jntington  Avenue,  Boston,  HA  02115,  (617) 732-1255.
      IIT Pesear, h Institute, 10 West 35th Street,  Chicago,  IL 60616,  (312)  567-4310.
      Lawrence Berkeley Laboratories, University of California,  Berkeley,  CA 94720,  (415) 486-4023.
      Niagara Mohawk, 300 Erie Boulevard West, Syracuse,  HY  13202,  (315)  474-I51U
      Oak Ridge national Laboratory, Oak Ridge, TK  37830,  (615)  574-6248.
      Pacific Power & Light, Portland, OR 97204, (5C3) 243-4876.
      Pierce, John B., Foundation, Vale Universicy, 290  Congress  Street,  New Haven,  CT 06519,  (203)  562-9901.
      PEDCo Environmental, Inc., 11499 Chester Road, Cincinnati,  OH 452H6,  (513)  782-4700.
      Re;earch Triangle Institute, Research Triangle Park,  I1C  27709,  (919)  541-6000.
      Tennessee Valley Authority, Chattanooga, TH 37401,  (615) 751-OQil.
      TRC Environmental  Consultants, Inc., 800 Connecticut  Boulevard,  East  Hartford, CT  06108,
        (203) 289-8531.
      University of Arizona, University Health Sciences  Center,  College  of  Medicine, Tucson,  AZ  65724
        (602) 626-6379.
      U.S.  Department of Energy, Environmental Measurements  Laboratory,  376  Hudson Street, New York  NY  10014
        (212) 620-3570.
                                                        10

-------
     Utility organizations sponsor the remainder of the listed indoor research
studies.  Prominent among these are the Electric Power Research Institute
(EPRI) and the Gas Research Institute (GRI).  Certain utilities such as the
Niagara Mohawk Power Company and the Pacific Power & Light Company also
support such ^search.

     In general, the ongoing research is aimed at examining important factors
influencing indnor air quality, with the possible exception of sink processes.
The largest number of projects relate to characterizing indoor air quality.
All pollutants known to be important are under study in at least one such
project.  About half the studies involve a limited number of structures--
generally two to three houses.  The other half involves larger field studies
involving 40-150 structures.

    Quantitative determination of emissions is the focus of seven studies.
Virtually all indoor sources found in a residential  environment are being
studied-  Five such studies are addressing emissions from unvented space
heaters, particularly gas and kerosene heaters.  These studies, except for
one, are being conducted in chambers or under laboratory conditions.

     A small number of studies involve the development of control  systems
to reduce indoor levels and instrumentation to measure indoor air quality.
These are chamber or laboratory studies.  The passive monitors, critical to
large-scale field studies, have been undertaken for a number of pollutants.
With the advent of personal monitors, a number of field studies are being
conducted or ^re planned.  Although the majority of field studies involve
pollutants such as CO and NC2, one study involves measuring personal
exposure to volatile organlcs.

     In addition, in two studies researchers are evaluating data collected in
previous studies to estimate the risk of exposure' to various pollutants.

     As results of the studies enumerated in Table i become available, the
data will provide answers to many of the current questions but may fall  short
of a rationally representative data base.   The next generation of studies are
likely to involve passive monitoring in large-sc^le field studies, detailed
characterization of contaminant transport within structures, and intensive
investigations of indoor air cleaning control  systems.
                                     11

-------
REFERENCES USED IN SECTION 2

Anderson, I., G.R. Lundquist, and L. Molhave.   1974.   "Formaldehyde in
     the Atmosphere of Danish Homes."  Ugeskr. Laeg.  136(38):2133-39 [in
     Danish].                          ~

Biersteker, K., H. DeGraaf, and Ch.A.G. Nass.   1965.   "Indoo- Air Pollution
     in Rotterdam Homes."  Int. J. Air Water Pollut.  9:343.

Cote. W.A., W.A. Wade III, and J.R. Yocom.  1974.  "A Study  of Indoor Air
     Quality."  Contract No. 68-C2-0745, EPA 650/4-74-042.   U.S.  Environmental
     Protection Agency, Washington, D,C.

Drivas, P.J., P.G. Simnonds. and F.H. Sheir.  1972.   "Experimental  Charac-
     terization of Ventilation Systems in Buildings."  Environ.  Sci. Technol.
     6:609.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  1979.  "Proceedings  of the Symposium
     on the Development and Usage of Personal  Monitors for  Exposure and
     Health Effect Studies."  D,T. Mage, and L.A. Wallace,  eds.   EPA-600/
     9-79-032, Research Triangle Park, N.C.

Fugas, M.  1975.  "Assessment of Total Exposure to an Air  Pollutant."
     Proceedings of the International Conference on  Environmental  Sensing and
     Assessment.  Paper 38-5, Vol. 2, Las Vegas, Nev., September  14-19.

Lowder, W.M., A.C. George, C.V. Gogolak, and A. Blay,  1971.   "Indoor Radon
     Daughter and Radiation Measurements in  East Tennessee  and Central Florida
     HASL Technical Memorandum No. TM-71-8,  Health and Safety Laboratory, U.S.
     Atomic Energy Commission, New York, N.Y.

Shair. F.H., and K.L. Heitner.  1974.  "A Theoretical Model  for Relating
     Indoor Pollutant Concentrations to Those  Outside."   Environ.  Sci.
     Techno! . 8:444-51.

Spedding, D.J., and R.P. Rowland.  1970.  "Sorption  of Sulfur Dioxide by
     Indoor Substances--!.  Wallpaper."  J.  Appl . Chem.  20:143-46 (also  see
     20:26-28 and 21:68-70).                  L

Turk, A.  1963.  "Measurements of Odorous Vapors in  Test Chambers:
     Theoretical."  ASHRAE J. 5(10) :55-58.

Yocom, J.E., W.L. Clink, and W.A. Cote.  1971.  "Indoor/Outdoor Air Quality
     Relationships."  J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc.  21:251.
                                     12

-------
                                 SECTION 3

                             INDOOR AIR QUALITY


     A number of pollutants  can be present in the indoor environment.  These
pollutants include those generated indoors, and those generated outdoors
and migrating indoors.  The  indoor concentrations of these pollutants are
dependent on various factors, including rate of indoor generation and rate of
infiltration from outside.

     This section provides a summary of information on 13 of the most common
indoor pollutants and pollutant groups and the factors that affect indoor air
quality.  Sources and recommended exposure guidelines are listed (Table 2).
A mass balance model relates various factors to indoor concentration levels.
and a simple numerical example illustrates use of the mass balance model.
Finally in this section, helpful publications are cited and summarized.

POLLUTANTS

Asbestos and Other Fibrous Aerosols

     Asbestos, which identifies a group of inorganic silicate mineral fibers,
is a widely used component of school, residential and private and public
structures.  The indoor release of asbestos depends on the cohesiveness of
the asbestos-containing material and the intensity of the distributing force.
For example, friable asbestos in the soft or loosely bound form used in fire-
proofing can become airborne easily by a disturbance of the material  surfdce.
Hard asbestos-containing materials such as vinyl  floor products release
asbestos only upon sanding,  grinding, or cutting.  Studies show that indoor
fiber counts and mass concentrations may exceed those outdoors, and on
occasion the levels may approach the occupational standards (2 fibers per
ml).  During normal use, buildings containing asbestos have not shown higher
fiber counts than are found  outdoors.  Limited data apply mostly to schools
and a few office buildings,  but the general public exposure to asbestos
fibers in public buildings appears to be exceedingly low.

Biological Aerosols

     Considerable evidence indicates that a number of contagious disease
organisms--inc"uding those associated with influenza, Legionnaires'  disease,
tuberculosis,  measles, mu.nps, and chicken pox--are capable of airborne
transmission in the indoor environment.  Respiratory diseases such as
common colds and pulmonary infections also involve airborne transmission.
The transmission occurs when the human respiratory tract emits liquid particles
that evaporate to a particle size that can remain airborne for ? period of
                                     13

-------
       TABLE 2.   SOURCES  AMD  EXPOSURE GUIDELINES OF INDOOR AIR CONTAMINANTS
          Pollutant/sources
                                                            Guideli nes
Asbestos -'.id Other  Fibrous  Aerosols

  Friable asbestos:   fireproofing,
  thermal and acoustic  insulation,
  decoration.
  Hard asbestos:  vinyl  floor and
  cement products,  automatic brake
  1i ni ngs (0) .*

Biological Aerosols

  Human and animal  metabolic activity
  products, infectious  agents,
  allergens, fungi,  bacteria in
  humidifiers, bacteria  in  cooling
  devices.

Carbon Monoxide

  Kerosene heaters,  gas  stoves,
  gas space heaters,  wood stoves,
  fireplaces, smoking,  and  auto-
  mobiles (0).

Formal dehyde

  Particleboard, paneling,  plywood,
  ceiling tile,  urea-formaldehyde
  foam insulation,  other construction
  material s.
Inhalable Particulates

  Smoking, vacuuming, combustion
  sources (0), industrial  sources,
  fugitive oust  (0), and other
  organic particulate constituents.
0.2 fibers/ml  for fibers  longer than
5 ur .oased on ASHRAE*  guidelines
of 1/10 of U.S.  8-hour  occupational
standard).
None available.
9 ppm for 8 hours  (NAA9S§);
35 ppm for 1  hour  (NAAQS).
0.1 ppm (based on  Dutch  and  West
German Guidelines  as  reported  in
ASHRAE Guidelines,  1981,  and
National  Research  Council  report,
1981).
55 to 110 ug/m3.annual .**
150 to 350 ug/rtP for 24 hours.
Metals and Other  Inorganic Particulate Contaminants
  Lead:  old paint, automobile exhaust (0).
  Mercury:  old paint, fossil fuel
   combustion (0).
  Cadmium:  smoking, use of  fungicides (0).
  Arsenic:  smoking, pesticides,  rodent
   poisons.
  Nitrates:  Outdoor air.
  Sulfates:  Outdoor air.
1.5 ug/m3 for 3  months  (NAAQS).
2 ug/m3 for 24 hours  (ASHRAE).

2 ug/m3 for 24 hours  (ASrlRAE).
None available.

None available.
4 ug/m3 annual ,  12  ug/m3  for
24 hours (ASHRAE).
                                                                          (continued',
* ASHRAE--Anerican Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
t (0) refers to outdoor sources.
§ NAAQS--U.S. National Ambient Air Quality Standards.
F These numbers indicate the probable range for the new NAAQS for participates  of
  10 urn or less in size.  Based on "Recommendations for the National  Ambient Air
  Quality Standards for Particulates--Revised Draft Paper," Strategies and Air
  Standard Division, Office of Air Programs, EPA, October 1981.

-------
                             TABLE 2.  (concluded)
          pollutant/suurces
                                                            Guidelines
Nitrogen Dioxide

  Gas stoves, gas space heaters,
  kerosene space heaters, combustion
  sources (0), automobile exhaust (0).

Ozone

  Photocopying machines, electro-
  static air cleaners, outdoor air.

Pesticides and Other Semivolatile Organics

  Sprays and strips, drift from area
  applications (0).

Polyaromatic Hydrocarbons and Other
  Organic Particulate Constituents

  Woodburning, smoking, cooking,
  coal combustion, and coke ovens (0).

Radon and Radon Progeny

  Diffusion through floors and
  basement walls from soil in contact
  with a residence, construction
  materials containing radium, untreated
  groundwater containing dissolved
  radon, combustion of natural gas used
  in cooking and unvented heating.
  Radon from local soil emanation (0).

Sulfur niniri de-
  Kerosene space heater' , coal and oil
  fuel combustion sources (0).

Volatile Organics

  Cooking, smoking, room deodorizers,
  cleaning sprays, paints, varnishes,
  solvents and other organic products
  used in homes and offices, furr,-' shi ngs
  such as carpets and draperies, clothing,
  furniture, emissions from waste dumps (0).
0.05 ppm annual  (HAAQS).
Not exceeding 0.12 ppm once  i.  year
(NAAQS).
5 ug/m3 for chlordane (NRC).*
Hone available.
O.Oi working level  (ASHRAE  guidelines).
80 ug/m3 annual;
315 ug/m3 for 24 hours (NAAQS).
Hone available.
 * national Research Council.  19G2.  "An Assessment of Health Risk of Seven Pesticides
   Used for Termite Control," national Academy Press, Washington,  D.C.
                                             15

-------
time.  Natural  air currents or convective ventilation  flows  then transport
the particles and deposit them in other human airways.   The  effect of  reduced
building ventilation on the incidence of infections  is  unknown.

     Only a few airborne allergens are found in  enclosed spaces.  A broad
array of pollens, fungi, algae, actinooycetes,  arthropod fragments,  dusts,
and pumices are confirmed airborne antigen sources  that evoke  adverse  human
responses; evidence is still emerging to implicate  airborne  bacteria,  protozoa.
ano other groups in a similar manner.  Although  human  exposure to airborne
allergens recurs for varying periods of time, no reliable indoor or outdoor
concentration data for allergens exist.

Carbon Monor.xide

     CO originates indoors primarily due to incomplete  fuel  combustion in gas
appliances, wood stoves, unvented space heaters, and  tobacco smoke.  Auto-
mobile emissions originating in attached or underground garages  can also be  a
significant source.  CO is essentially nonreactive,  and in the abse.tce of
indoor sources, average indoor CO concentrations generally compare to  outdoor
concentrations.  Cut if indoor sources are present,  indoor levels can  be two
or more tines greater than those outdoors.  Indoor  levels can  occasionally
exceed the 8-hour ambient standard, especially  if significant  indoor sources
are present.  Exceedar.ces of the 1-hour standard have  not been observed, but
sufficient data have not been collected in high-risk  environments such as
northern city tenements in winter.

Formaldehyde

     HCHO, formerly used in insulation, is a component  in binders used in
commercial wood products.  Indoor sources of HCHO include particleboard,
plywood, hardwood paneling, furniture, urea formaldehyde foam  insulation,
tobacco smoke,  and gas combustion.  Some of the  highest concentrations,
exceeding 0.1 ppm, have been found in tightly constructed mobile homes where
internal volumes are small compared with surface areas  of HCHO-containing
materials.  HCHO emissions increase with increasing  temperature  and humidity.

Inhalable Particulate Matter

     Concentrations of IP matter are determined  as  mass per  unit volume of
all particles below a defined aerodynamic diameter,  which is commonly  10 urn.
Within this size range are two fractions — a coarse  fraction  of 2.5 to  10 un
and a fine fraction of 0 to 2.5pni.  The fine fraction  is associated with
alveolar penetration.

     Until recently, measurements of particulate matter have centered  on
TSP matter, with essentially no size selection.   S;nce  the late  1970s,
determinations  have focused upon respirable suspended  particulates (RSP)
(0 to 15 urn, with correspond!na coarse and fine  subdivisions at  2.5pml and
respirable dust (0 to 7.5 pm).  It is probably  more  important  to stipulate
consideration of particle size than to stimulate the  exact size  selection.
                                     16

-------
                         The fine and coarse fraction of IP have different sources  and chemical
                    composition.   Fine particles are mainly produced by coagulation of AHken
                    nuclei  (<0.1  imi)  and by vapor condensation onto these nuclei.   Fine particles
                    typically consist of sulfates,  nitrates,  ammonium salts,  organics,  and  lead
                    produced by various combustion  processes  and atmospheric  transformations.
                    Coarse  particles  are mainly produced by mechanical  forces such  as  crushing
                    and abrasion.  Generally,  these particles consist of finely  divided minerals
                    such as oxides of silicon,  iron, and aluminum;  plant, animal, and  insect
                    fibers; tire  particle:, and sea salt.

                         Chemical analyses of  IP suggest that indoor and outdoor compositions
                    differ, indicating that the building envelope acts  as a  barrier to outdoor
                    sources.   However, indoor  IP mass may  exceed outdoor level0.,  ind1eating that
                    indoor  sources such as smoking, other  combustion,  and reentrained  dust
                    ai e important determinants  for  indoor  concentrations.

                    Metr-ls  and Other  Inorganic  Farticulate Constituents

                         Metals found in the indoor environment include heavy elemental  substances
                    such as lead  (Pb), mercury  (Hg), and arsenic (As).   These substances  are
                    components of the participate matter discussed  elsewhere  in  this section.
                    Evidence indicates that these metals have no significant  indoor sources.  One
                    exception, however, is lead, which contaminates old,  low-income housing when
                    the feet of occupants grind peeling lead-base paint into  small-size particles.
                    In addition,  smoking and the use of some  pesticides contribute  to  indoor
                    levels  of heavy trace metals such as arsenic and cadmium.  Reentrainment
                    is another possible indoor  source when dust and particles enter a  building
                    either  through infiltration or  by being brought in  by footwear.

                         Other inorganic constituents include sulfates  and nitrates.   Information
                    on indoor generation of sulfates and nitrates is not available.

                    Nitrogen Dioxide

                         N02 sources  ere the same a? those for CO,  but  NC>2 emissions result
                    frcm high-temperature fuel  cocbustion,  whereas  CO  results from  incomplete
                    combustion.   N02  is a relatively reactive gas.   In  the absence  of  indoor
                    sources,  indoor N02 levels  are  usually equ;d  to or  somewhat  lower  than
                    outdoor concentrations.  If indoor sources are  present, indoor  N0£  concen-
                    trations  can  exceed outdoor levels by  a factor  of  five or more.  Short-term
                    (1-hour or 24-hour) indoor  NOj  concentrations in residences  with indoor
                    sources can also  exceed the annual  NAAQS  of 0.05 ppm.

                    Ozone
 I
 /                        In most  cases, the source  of indoor  03 is  ambient air.   Exceptions
 '                   include certain types of office copying machines and  air  cleaners  that
I                   work  on electrostatic principles.   03  decays  very rapidly indoors.   The
                    half-life period  for 03, or the tine required to reduce to one-half of
                    the original  concentration,  is  less than  30 minutes.   Thus,  high indoor 63
                    levels  are seldom encountered.


                                                        17

-------
Pesticides and Other Semi volatile Organics

     Pesticides include a large group of commercially available toxic organic
compounds used to control pests.  Indoor sources of these substances include
spray cans, pest strips and other coated surfaces, and contaminated fruits
and flowers.  Some of the pesticides commonly used in or near the indoor
residential environment are chlordane, used to control carpenter ants and
termites; dichlorvos, used in flea collars for dogs and cats; and carbamate,
used in home insecticides.  Limited data exist on indoor concentrations of
pesticides.

     Polychlorinated biphenyls  (PCBs) have excellent dielectric properties for
use in electric transformers and capacitors.  PCBs are no longer used in indoor
applications, but large office  buildings sometimes have PCB-containing trans-
formers and many homes still contain PCB-filled fluorescent light ballasts.
Limited data exist on indoor PCB concentrations.

Polyaromatic Hydrocarbons and Other Organic Participate Constituents

     Polyaromatic hydrocarbons  (PAHs) represent a large family of complex
organic substances that include known and suspected carcinogens.  Although
benzo-a-pyrene (BaP) may not well represent PAH exposures,  BaP has often been
measured as a surrogate indicator.  PAHs are derived from incomplete organic
combustion in such processes as coke manufacture, asphalt production and use,
and coal burning.  Indoors, the principal sources of PAH are woodburm'ng,
smoking, and cooking.  A combustion source emits PAHs in a vaporous form that
quickly condenses on suspended  aerosols.

     Concentrations of these substances 5re in the nanogram-per-cubic-meter
range; and a great deal of debate has focused on the amount of total PAH
missed by  sampling only condensed PAH.  However, exposure to the vapor phase
PAHs may not be as significant  as PAHs condensed onto particulates.  Data on
indoor to  outdoor concentration comparisons are not available.

Radon and  Radon Progeny

     Rn is a noble gas that has three naturally occurring radioactive iso-
topes (atomic masses of 219, 220, and 222) with half lives of 3.96 seconds,
55.6 seconds, and 3.82 days, respectively.  Because of its longer half-life,
222Rn and  its associated progeny  (210p0lonium, 214Lead, 214Eh smuth, and
214p0ionium) are the principal  sources of Rn exposure.

     Rn is spontaneously released from radium-containing geological materials.
The gas may diffuse through pore  spaces of the material or be transported by
water and  eventually enter' the  indoor air space by bulk diffusion through
foundation materials, diffusion through cracks, or entry through the water
st'pply.  Additionally, a building composed of radium-beading material may
itself be  a source of Rn.
                                     18

-------
     Rn progeny "levels are related to radon concentrations,* and both  are
determined by competing mechanisms of production and removal.   However,  the
progeny ions may be intercepted by indoor surfaces (plate out),  as  well  as
become attached to aerosols.  Generally,  between 50 and  95 percent  of  the
progeny ions become attached to aerosols, some of which  could  leave indoors
due to air exchange.
     Outdoor levels of Rn are generally on the order of 10~1  nCi/m^,  cor-
responding to 10~3 to 10-4 WL.  Average indoor levels are  estimated  to  be
on the order of a few nanocuries per cubic meter (10~3 to  10~2  WL).   Extreme
cases exceeding 50 nCi/m^ (on the order of 10~1 WL)  have  been reported.

Sulfur Dioxide

     Except for kerosene space heaters, indoor sources of  S02 are  rare.   It
has been postulated that sulfur in kerosene can result in  indoor S02
concentrations.  Like 03, S02 also undergoes chemical  transformation  on
indoor surfaces such as upholstery fabrics, draperies, and carpets,  resulting
in lower indoor concentrations.  The half-life period for  SOg ,  however,  is
longer than for 63.  In the absence of indoor sources, indoor S02  concen-
trations in homes have been genera"1 ly found to be lower than  outdoor  concentra-
tions .

Volatile Organics

     A long list of volatile organic vapor compounds are  emitted indoors.
These compounds are commonly found in many modern building and  decorating
materials and in a variety of consumer products.  Principal  indoor sources
of these compounds include solvents, furnishings, and other consumer  products
such as aerosols and coatings.  Various indoor activities  such  as  cooking,
smoking, and arts and crpfts also generate emissions of volatile organics.
Concentrations of these pollutants vary widely from  home  to home,  depending
on source, strength, rate of ventilation,  and other  factors.   The  expense of
chemical analysis limits the measurement of indoor concentrations  of  volatile
organics, but studies show that indoor concentrations exceed  outdoor  levels.
   Rn concentrations are usually seated in  nanocuries  per  cubic  meter
   (nCi/m^).  A curie is defined as 3.7 x 10^  radioactive disintegrations
   per second.  Rn progeny activity is usually  expressed  in terms  of working
   level  (WL).  One working level  corresponds  to any  combination of Rn  progeny
   in a liter of air that ultimately emits  1.3  x 1CP  rnegael ectronvol ts
   (MeV)  of alpha particle energy.   In the  ideal  case   1  nCi/m^  is equivalent
   to 0.01 WL.  In realistic situations,  this  relationship may be  as low  as
   1  nCi/m3 per 0.005 WL, for two reasons:   Progeny  ions  remain  unattached
   or the ions attach to other surfaces and thus are  not measured.
                                     19

-------
FACTORS THAT AFFECT INDOOR AIR QUALITY

     Many factors acting alone or in combination can influence the indoor
concentrations of a pollutant.  For example, pollutants infiltrate from
outdoors, indoor sources generate pollutants, indoor air exfTitrates, and
decay or cleaning devices remove pollutants.  Thus, indoor changes in pollutant
mass, which govern indoor concentrations, can be expressed as

     accumulation rate   rate of [input + generation   output - sink]
          VdC
             T n
     dt
dt
   rate of
=  change in
   mass due to
                         infiltration
                       ,of outdoor ai rl
I generation\
I  indoors  1
                         :&xfiltration '
                         Df indoor air,
                                  indoor removal
                                  of pollutants
                                                            (1)
where:  V is the indoor volume
        C-jn is the indoor concentration.

     The four terms in the right-hand side of the equation are discussed
below.

Infiltration of Pollutants from Outdoors

     The amount of pollutants that infiltrates indoors is a product of two
factors:  (1) volume rate of air exchange (v\l, where v is the air exchange
rate measured in air changes per hour) between outdoor and inuoors through
the building envelope and (2) outdoor pollutant concentrations (Cou-t).
Additionally, when outdoor air enters a structure, a certain fraction, f,  may
be deposited in the cracks and crevices in the building envelope resulting
in a filtration or scrubbing effect.  Thus,  the infiltration of pollutants
for outdoor air over a time period, dt, can  be expressed as (1 - fh-VCoutdt.

Indoor Generation

     A variety of indoor sources—appliances and materials—generate certain
pollutants.   When a source is constantly producing these contaminants for a
time period, dt, the indoor generation could be expressed as Sdt, where S is
the rate of indoor emission.  Although, to a limited extent, quantitative
values for S may be estimated through indoor studies, chamber studies yield
more reliable information.
                                     20

-------
     The expression for S is more complex when a time-varying  source  is  con-
sidered.  For example, a gas range may be turned on for limited  periods  some
days and not at all on other days.  When the burner is on,  the gas  flow  rate
is varied to suit cooking.  Even more important is that the quantitative
information on S for various indoor sources and pollutants, even when treated
as a constant rate, is not often available.  Additionally,  a generation  term
to account for the indoor reentrainment of a contaminant such  as particulate
matter is difficult to quantify.

Exfiltration of Indoor Air

     Exfiltration, like infiltration, is the product of volume rate of air
exchange UV) and the concentration of air (Cex-jt) leaving  the structure.
In cases where the indoor space can be assumed to be well mi^ed, Cexit will
be the same as C-jn.  Thus, the exfiltration term can be expressed as
          A further discussion on mixing appears later in  this section.
Indoor Pollutant Removal or Decay

     Certain pollutants such a; NOg, 03,  and SOj decrease in  concentra-
tion due to chemical decay or adsorption  of the contaminants,  particularly
on indoor surfaces.  The rate of decey can be expressed as Xdt,  which  has
been scudied to a limited extent for such pollutants.   Another sink  for
indoor pollutants is their removal  through ?ir cleaning devices.   This term
would be simpler to quantify, as it depends on the volume of  air going
through a cleaning device ano the efficiency of the device.   This removal
term can be expressed as qFC-jndt when q is the volume  Mow rate  and  F  is
the fraction removed by cleaning devices.

Generalized Mass Balance Equation

     Considering the four terms in equation (I), a generalized mass  balance
equation for indoor concentration under well-mixed conditions would  be

          VdCin   (1-f) v VCoutdt + Sdt -  cVCindt - Xdt   qFCindt

or


          dcin                S      -    '\
           dt                 V          V     V


     To account for imperfect mixing of the interior, a mixing factor is
introduced.  The mixing factor, m, can be defined as the ratio of reside ice
time of a pollutant under well-mixed conditions over actual  residence tine.
                                     21

-------
In other words, the air exchange rate for a pollutant is the product of m
and the air exchange rate, or equal to mi>.  Thus, in the abience of ideal
mixing conditions, the equation (2) can be modified to
dC-jn                 C

~dT = (1"f)m"Cout   ^ -
                                               qpcin
                                               	
                                                 V
                                                             (3!
     This differential equation can be solved if the form of the parameters
on the right-hand side are known.  The form of this time-dependency (or depend-
ency on other variables) will vary for different pollutants and different
situations.  Thus, a general solution will be exceedingly complex.  Illustra-
tive solutions of this equation for two different conditions are given below.
Example
     CO nay be the simplest case to consider.  CO does not decay (thus, X
and cannot be removed by available air cleaning devices (F = 0).  It also
does not get deposited during infiltration (f = 0).  Further assume that
outdoor concentration of CO is zero, the house is completely tight ( v - 0)
circulation fan is on (m   1), and a gas burner of the cooking range is on at
the maximum setting.  The emission rate for CO has been found to be 1800 mg/h
(Traynor et al. 197y).  If we assume an average single family residence of
1500 ft^, the house volume (V) would be approximately 325 m^.

     Given this information, one can insert proper numerical values into
equation (3):
                                                                0)
                                                                the
          dC
                                    0
                               0
           dt
                        out
                                                                         (4)
or,
           dt
                                  1  / 1
                     325 \m3
in   i>   T onn /mg\    l/l\   rr/mg   i\   no  PP|n
—- =	1800 I —-1 x 	  —I = 5.5 [ -2. x — 1   4.8 l1^-

                                                     V
                                                                         (5!
Thus, in such a case, the indoor concentration would increase at the rate of
almost 5 ppm per hour.  If we assume that the initial indoor concentration
before turning on the burners was zero, at the end of 2 hours the indoor
concentration will be 9.6 ppm.

-------
     Let us now make the same example somewhat more realistic by assuming an
air exchange rate of one-half air changes per hour ( i< =0.5 h-1).  If we
assume that Cout is 2 ppm and remains constant, initial  indoor concentration
(i.e., before starting trie gas range) will be equal to outdoor concentration.
With the forced air fan on providing good mixing (m   1), equation (3) becomes
      dt
              1 xO.5  ±  xCir,  ^
                                 mg
            (6.69
     Rearranging equation (6),

             dcin
          1 - 0.075 C
                     —   6.69 dt
                     in
                                                   325 Vm3
     Solving the differential equation,



              = 13.3 (1   e"°-5


            <-in,o                  °


Thus, to calculate Cjn after 2 hours,


          Cin,2   I3-3 I 1 ~ ~ )    ^in,o-


But according to initial  conditions, C-jnj0 = 2.3 mg/m3, thus,

                   cin,2 h = 5-3 P
                                                                             (6)
                                                                             (7]
                                                                             (8)
                                                                             (9)

-------
With an air exchange rate of only 0.5 air changes per hour, the indoor
concentration does not increase as rapidly as it did for the earlier case
with no air exchange.

REVIEW PUBLICATIOi.5

     Several publications—books, journal articles, proceedings of symposia,
and technical reports—describe different aspects of indoor air quality and
related research.  Below is an annotated bibliography of some of the important
publications providing additional information.

National Research Council, Committee on  Indoor Pollutants.   1981.  Indoor
     Pollutants.  National Academy Press, Washington, O.C.

     The National Research Council (NRC) report, containing over 500 pages,
is a comprehensive review and appraisal  of indoor air quality literature.
This report includes chapters on sources and characterization of indoor
pollutants, factors that  influence exposure, monitoring and modeling, healtn
effects, welfare effects, and control of indoor pollution.   Recommendations
for further research are presented, and an extensive list of references
follows each chapter.  Although the NRC report lacks author or subject
indexes, the report can serve as a starting point for any literature review.

l-leye*", C.B.  Indoor Air Quality.  1933.   Addi son-V.'esley Publishing Co., Inc.,
     Reading, Mass.

     Intended for specialists as well as nonspecial ists, Meyer's book provides
a useful review of the chemical, physical, and biological parameters of
indoor air quality.  Opening chapters of the 434-page book  provide an overview
and trace the history of indoor air problems.  Other chapters discus^ comfort
factors, building parameters, indoor pollutants and sources, monitoring
techniques, indoor concentrations and exposure, health effects, control
techniques, anc regulatory trends.  Summaries of results and data from
various "esearch studies are included.  The hard-bound book is supplemented
by an extensive bibliography that is current to March 1952.  Author and
subject indexes enhance the utility of the book.

Wadden, R.A., and P.A. Scheff.  1983.  Indoor Air Pollution, Characterization,
     Prediction, and Control.  John VJil ey and Sons, Inc. , Somerset, I-J.J.

     Developed for an Air Pollution Control  Association Continuing Education
Course on indoor air pollution, this book provid-es a review cf indoor air
quality problems and offers methods for identification and  amelioration.   The
text is organized into four areas:  (1)  characterization, including i;idoc>-
sources, measurement techniques, and health effects criteria; (i] prediction,
v.hich summarizes indoor air quality models;  (3) control, describing control
systems standa'-d^ and design; and (4) application, which addresses both
commercial  a.ic' domestic applications.  (This textbook was unavailable for
review at tie ^'rue of publication.)
                                     24

-------
Emnjrpnment International.  1982.  Vol.  B,  Nos.  1-6,  Special  Issuer
     ""Indoor Air Pollution."  Pergamon Press,  Elmsford,  N.Y.

     This special issue contains 67 artirlps selected through peer review
from more than 100 papers presented at the  International  Symposium on  Indoor
Air Pollution, Health and Energy Conservation  held at Amherst,  Massachusetts,
in 1981.  The volume addresses five topics:   (1)  Policy  and  Public Health;
(Z) Sources, Concentrations, and Exposures  to  Pollutants  (with  specific
attention to Rn, organics, HCHO, CO, and aerosols);  (3)  Health  and Comfort
Aspects of Indoor Pollutants and Indoor Climate;  (4)  Engineering Aspects of
Ventilation, Contaminant Control, and Energy Conservation;  and  (5) Modeling
the Physical and Chemical Behavior of Pollutants  Within  Structures.

Bui>^ing Air Change Rate and Infiltration Measurement.   1980.  C.M.  Hunt,
     J.D. King, and H.R. Trechsel, edlTASTM  STecial  Technical  Publication 719.
     American Society for Testing and Materials,  Philadelphia,  Pa.

     This volume contains papers presented  at  a  symposium held  on March  >3,
1978, in Washington, D.C., and organized by  the  ASTM  subcommittee E06.41 on
infiltration performance.  Eleven papers cover two major  areas—measurement
aspects of infiltration and significance of  air  infiltration  on such factors
as energy consumption, building design and  codes, and indoor  air pollution.
The volume also contains a transcript of the panel  discussion and a  symposium
summary.

Yocom, J.E.  198?..  "Indoor-Outdoor Air Quality  Relationships."   J.  Ai r
     Pollut. Control Assoc. 32(5):500-20.  See also,  Discussion Papers,
     J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc. 32(9):904,  September  1982.

     The article reviews research conducted  on the relationships of  indoor
and outdoor air quality.  The Air Pollution  Control  Association (APCA)
commissioned the article as a critical review  paper,  and  it  was presented
and critiqued at the APCA meeting in Mew Orleans  in June  1982.   The  article
begins with a historical overview, followed  by a  review  of research  on  a
pol 1 utant-by-pollutant basis.  The conclusions consist of generalized  ratios
of indoor to outdoor concentrations for each pollutant.   Although these
generalized ratios can be useful, various discussion  papers  point out  the
limitations of such an approach.

Wallace, L.A., and W.R. Ott.  1982.  "Personal Monitors:   A  State-of-the-Art
     Survey."  J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc. 32(6):601-10.

     The progress in personal monitoring is  reviewed  in  this  article.   It
defines types of personal monitors and samp1ing  approaches,  reviews  their
history, and discusses the current status on a pol1utant-by-pol1utant  basis.
The article is especially useful because it  characterizes instruments  in
terms of "field-tested" and "laboratory-tested"  equipment.   In  addition,  the
article defines the research needed to further develop personal  monitors.
                                     25

-------
Meyer, C.B., and R.P. Hartley.  1982.   Inventory of Current Indoor Air
     Quality Related Research.  EPA-600/57-81-119,  IJTIS PB 82-127-952,
     National TecTinicTTlnfcTnTiation Service,  Springfield,  Va.

     This bibliography, prepared in 1981, lists a total of 171 current or
recent projects covering six areas of  indoor  air quality research:  monitoring,
instrumentation, health effects, control  technology, risk  assessment,  and
pollutant characterization.  The bibliography cross-references the following
subjects:  Rn, nitrogen oxides, CO, HCHO, asbestos, RSP, organics, tobacco
smoke, odors, 03, biological pollutants,  and  multipollutant studies.
Information on each project includes principal  investigator,  project sponsor,
funding level, and abstract.

Sandia National Laboratories.  1982.  Indoor  Air Quality Handbook for
     Designers, Builders, and Users of Energy-Efficient Residence's^Sc ndi a
     82-1773, Albuquerque, N. Mex.      ~    ~  '      ~~~

     The purpose of this handbook is to assist designers,  builders,  and  users
of energy-efficient residences in achieving the apparently conflicting goals
of energy efficiency and good indoor air  quality.  In an easy-to-understand
style, the handbook covers a variety of topics  including effects of  building
systems, health effects, evaluation, control, and legal aspects.

REFERENCE

Traynor, G.  1979.  "Gas Stove Emissions."   Presented at the  Annual  Technical
     Review on Building Ventilation anc1 Indoor Air  Quality, Lawrence Berkeley
     Laboratory, Berkeley, Calif., October  30-31.
                                     26

-------
                                 SECTION •'•

                            MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS


     Many measurement instruments and nethods developed for outdoor ambient
and workplace monitoring have been adapted to indoor settings, but relatively
few instruments and analytical methods have been developed specifically for
indoor monitoring.  Two types of measurement systems can be used for indoor
monitoring.  The  first consists of purchasing off-the-shelf, commercially
available instrumentation, and the second requires assembling commercial ly
available components.

     The use of commercially available -instrumentation offers obvious benefits:
The measurement techniques are accepted, and the user avoids the time or
effort needed to  assemble and test measurement systems.  For some applications,
however, commercial instrumentation is unavailable or too expensive.   In some
of these cases, users can assemble a measurement system by ur^ng commercially
available components.

     This document defines an "instrument" as a ready-to-use measuring
device, such as a GE carbon monoxide detector, that can be purchased preas-
sembled.  In contrast, a "method" indicates that the user must assemble
various components, possibly from different suppliers, to construct a system
by using a standard or an accepted method.  Sampling for organic vapors,  for
example, may be carried out by o number of methods, all of which involve a
user-fabricated sorbant trap for sample collection followed by gas chrom-i-
tography associated with various detention systems such as mass spectroscopy,
electron capture, or flame ionization.

     This section addresses both measurement systems.   A categorization
scheme is defined.  Operating principles of various measurement systems are
outlined and measurement systems currently available are listed.  Finally,
sources of information and key references for instrumentation and methods are
given.  The background provided in this section, combined with the design
considerations described in the next section, will enable users to select the
appropriate measurement systems.

DEFINITIONS

     In selecting instrumentation or methods, users must consider the
monitoring objectives.  The following questions will help to define the
monitoring objectives:

     o    Is recording the peak concentration of a pollutant
          important to the study?  Will short-term (from a few hours
          to 1 day) time-weighted averages suffice?  Or are long-term
          averages (many days, weeks, or months) needed7
                                     27

-------
     o    Will the exposure characterization measurement be conducted
          for a fixed location or for individuals who may move from
          one nicroenvironment to another?

     To translate these objectives into instrument or method categories,
users can consider three factors.  First is sampling mobility, followed by
operating characteristics and, finally, output characteristics.  The instru-
ments and methods in use provide three classes of sampling mobility:

     o    Personal--The unit may be conveniently carried or worn by
          a oerson.

     9    Portable--The unit may be hand-carried from one place to
          another during sampling, but the unit does not offer the
          convenience of a personal  device.

     »    Stationary—The unit must operate from a fixed location.

Obviously, either a personal or portable measureiTient system can be used in a
stationary mode.  Portable instruments or methods are often the only recourse
for personal  mom tor ing of some pollutants, and such instruments are less
expensive than the equivalent stationary instruments.

     Within each class of mobility are two categories of operating character-
istics:

     •    Active—A power source is required to draw sample air
          to a sensor or collector.

     •    Passive—No power suurce is required; sample acquisi-
          tion relies on diffusion.

     Finally, within each mobility and operating class, users must define the
needed output characteristics of the measurement system:

     •    Analyzer—Almost simultaneously, the unit produces a
          signal that corresponds to the pollutant concentration.

     e    Col lector—The collected sample is analyzed, or quanti-
          tated, in a laboratory.

Analyzers are most useful in determining peak concentrations.  Additionally,
because the analyzer produces time series information, the integrated results
can generate time-weighted average concentrations.  Data obtained  from
collectors are limited only to time-weighted average concentrations, informa-
tion on peak concentrations is net available.
                                     28

-------
     This classification system produces 12 combinations of categories,
ranging from simple stationary/passive/collectors to sophisticated personal/
active/analyzers.

INSTRUMENTS AND METHODS

     The measurement parameters of greatest interest in indoor air quality
monitoring are pollutant concentrations, air exchange rates, and environmental
variables.  The paragraphs below summarize the technologies associated with
these measurements.  Appendix A describes the instruments, and Appendix B
discusses the various methods that use components.

Pollutant Concentrations

     Pollutants of interest in indoor air quality monitoring include CO, l'02,
£02, 03, HCHO, and Rn and Rn progeny.  Other pollutants of interest may
be considered as classes of pollutants with variable compositions:  fibrous
aerosols (of which asbestos is of great concern), biological aerosols, a
number of organic vapors (including pesticides), and IP-  Table 3 shows a
number of measurement techniques available for the above pollutants.

     Tab!,- 4 highlights the operating principles of selected pollutant
measurement systems.  For each pollutant and operating principle, the categories
of instruments or methods are listed.  The table also cross-references parts
of Appendixes A and B.  For CO, N02, S02, and 03, stationary analyzers
have been developed to support the monitoring required by the I1AAQS.  Instru-
ments that appear on the EPA List of Reference and Equivalent Methods for
these pollutants are listed in Appendix A.  In some cases, portable analyzers
based on reference and equivalent methods are available.

     Recent advances in electrochemical oxidation cells and supporting
electronics have produced personal  and portable analyzers for CO and S02-
Signal  integrating and data logging devices, which can be used for integ^a-
tion over time of continuous readings for personal monitors, are available
(Appendix A).  While such devices have been extensively used with CO personal
monitors, they can be used with any device providing a continuous anjlog
voltage signal.  Passive collectors are available for N0.2 and S02-

     Commercially available devices for monitoring HCHO include an automated
wet chemical  analyzer and two passive collectors.  For fibrous aerosols,
especially asbestos, users can determine concentrations with manual methods
or with a portable analyzer.

     Portable IP Analyzers are based on optical  scattering and on piezoelectric
resonance.  One manufacturer offers an optical-scattering analyzer sufficiently
miniaturized for personal  monitoring of IP-  Stationary collectors are also
available.  Appendix B discusses methods for collecting IP for personal
exposure and for analyzing organic  and inorganic constituents.
                                     29

-------
              Table 3.  TVPtS OF AVAILABLE MEA3UREMIST SYSTEM CATEGORIES 3Y POLLUTANT-
                                                    Personal
                                               Active   Pass'vt
  Asbestos and other
  Fibrous Aerosols
                                  Coll ector
                                  Analyzer
  Biological Aerosols
                                  Col 1 ector
                                  Analyzer
  Carbon Monoxide
                                  Collector
                                  Analyzer
                                                                     Portable          Stationary
                                                                 Active  i Passive    Active    Passive   I
  Formdldehyde
                                  Collector
                                  Analyzer
                                                                                  -Y-,
                                  Collector
  Inhalable Participates
                                  Analyzer
                                                    ^r
                                  Collector ^,
  Petals and Other
  Inoi"ianic* ^articulate
  Constituents
                                  Analyzer
  Nitrogen Dioxide
                                  Collector
                                  Analyzer
                                  Collector
  Ozone
                                  Analyzer
  Pesticides and Or.:>er
  Senivolatile Organics
                                  Collector I
                                  Analyzer
I  Polynuclear Aromatic Hydro-     Collector j
j  carbons 3 Other Organic	1
i  Participate Consti'-uents*       Analyzer
  Radon and Salon  Progeny
                                  Collector
                                  Analyzer
                                  Collector
  Sulfur Dioxide
                                  Analyzer
  Volatile Orqanics
                                  Collector
                                  Analyzer
* Oroanic/i norqam'c collection is similar to that  for  lp; nethcds discussed in Appendix 3 cover
  analytical techniaues.
LEGEND:
         7  One  or more commercially available instruments for this pollutant anu measurement



                                                           jrement category are summarized in Appendix 3.
/7.//7 A/ /'  One or more connercially available inst
\\j-.J-J/'//.}.  catenory are summarized in Appendix A.


            One or rrore methods  for this pollutant ar.d
i.*.'.'.".".'!  I nstrjnents  35 well as methods are summdnze-i in Appendixes A and 3.
                                                   30

-------
                                 rAIILE 4.   iurt'A!;'-' IF  SELECTED  POLLUTANT CONCENTRATION MCASURtMENT SYSTEMS
Pollutant
Asbestos ind
other fibrous
aerosol s

Indue
elect
dot'jc
from
fiber
Operating principle
^d Oscillation /Optical Scatter ing--
e aTr passe~s tTTrouqTT a~n"bsc"Tllating
ric field. Fibers are detected by
ting right-angle scattering pulses
la^uer illumination aligned ^i tli the
axi s.
Personal ,
portable,
or stationary
Portdble
Acti ve
or
passive
Active
Analyzer
or Appendix
col lector cross-reference*
Analyzer Al-1
                Fi1tration--A 1aborjtory  analyzes  the
                TITters".
                                                                 Personal
                                                                                   Active
                                                                                                 Collector
01olonic
aerosols
lmpdcttoj]--Sampl ,e.
Microbial colonies are Incubated for
24 hours and counted Punually.
                                                                 Stationary
                                                                                   Active
                                                                                                 Collector
                                                                                                                 A2-1, A2-2
Carbon
mono*1de
Nondispersive Infrared  (fJD_IR)--infrared          Stationary         Active         Analyzer
rTfffali~on~paVsc":>~throijg'li para"!lei optical
cells, one containing sample  air, the
other containing reference CO-free air.
The difference in absorbance  relates to
CO concentration.

Gas Filter Correlation  (GFCK-Infrared           Stationary         Artive         Analyzer
raHiYtron p'aTses tnrougTT~a~spi nnl ng f 11 t?r
wheel that contains a sealed  CO reference
cell and a nitrogen reference cell.  The
IR beam then passes through a chamber con-
taining sample air and  is detected.  The
signal difference observed between the
nitrogen cell and the CO cell relates to
CO concentration.

Electrochenical  Oxidation—Sample air            Personal           Active         Analyzer
passes~into an elcctrocTie"mical cell              Personal           Passive        Analyzer
where oxidation of CO to CO?                     Portable           Active         Analyzer
produces 
-------
                                                  TABLE 4.  (continued)

Pollutant
Inhal able
parti cul ate
matter

Operating principle
Optical Scatterinq--Sjmule air passes
ThTmTgh a TiTe-seTective inlet prior to
enterinq an optical cell. Forward light
scattering from controlled light source
relates t^ IP concentration.
Personal ,
portable.
or stationary
Pers^al
Portable
Active
or
passive
Passive
Active
         Fi1tration--Sample air passes through a         Stationary
         sTzTT-leTe'ctive inlet.  Particles in size
         range(s) of interest are retained on
         filter(s) for mass detenni nation in
         Ipbo-'atory.

         Impaction--Sample air passes through a          Personal
         slTrTes of selective stages; inertial
         effects cause particles in sue range of
         interest to -.ollide with collector surface.

         Piezoelectric [;esonance--Sample air passes      Portable
         tm-~6i7qh a sTzV-sclectTve inlet.  Particles      Stationary
         within the size rang? of Interest are
         electrostatically precipitated onto a
         quartz crystal.  Alterations in oscillation
         frequency relate to collected mass.
                                                                           Active
Active
                                                                                         Analyzer
                                                                                            or
                                                                                         collector
                                                                                         Analyzer
                                                                                         Analyzjr
                                                                                         Col lector
              Collector
                                      Appendix
                                   cross-reference*
                              A5-1
                              A5-2
                                                                                                         A5-3,  A5-4,  B
                              A5-5
Metals and
other
i norgani c
paniculate
constituents
Hi iroqen
d 1 uxi tic

Filter Collection/Laboratory Analysis--
Tnorgamc constituents are coiTet.tcd~ by
passing sample air through a suitable
fMter. Metals may be quantitated by
atomic absorption spectroscopy, neutron
activation analysis, proton- .' nduced
X-ray fluorescence. Nitrates and sulfates
can be determined spectrophotometri cally .
Hris-Phase Chfini lurnl nescence--Photon
emission lluit "accomp~arTes~reaction of NO
with 03 is monitored to simultaneously
quantify HO and NOX. Nux Is quantified
hy first reducing all oxides of nitrogen
to nitric oxide, "NO. N(>2 is the algebraic
difference between NOX and NO.
Triethanol Amine (TEA) Adsorption—NO?
is quantitatively sorbed onto treated
substrate for subsequent quantitation
in the laboratory.
Wot Chemical -N0;> reacts with
a reaqent system and is quantified
colorimctrical ly .
Personal
Portable
Stationary
Stationary
Portable
Personal
Portable
Personal
Acti ve
Active
Active
Active
Active
Passive
Active
Passive
Collector B
Collector
Collector
Analyzer EPA Reference Method,
Apnendlx A
Analyzer A6-1
Collector A6-3, A6-5
Analyzer A6-4
Collector A6-2
fi denotes the appendix where system 1s discussed; the numbers following A show Instrument summary number.
                                                                                                                       (continued)

-------
                                                       TABLE 4.   (continued)
Pollutant
Ozone
Operating principle
Gas-Phase Chemi lumi ne see nco --Photometric
3etectTon of "~th~e~ cheniiYumTnescence
resulting from the gas-phase reaction
between ethylene and 63.
Personal ,
portable,
or stationary
Stationary
Portable
              Gas-Solid Phase Chemlluminescence--             Stationary
              Photometric "cfeTectTon~bT tHe
              chemi1umi nescence result1ng from
              the reaction between 63 and
              rhodami ne-B.

              Ultraviolet Absorption—Measurement of          Stationary
              the tli rfe rence~l n~ nTFrav 1 ol e t in ten si ty
              between  samplf air and reference.
                                                                                Acti ve
                                                                                  or
                                                                                passi ve

                                                                                Active

                                                                                Active


                                                                                Active
                                                                  Active
                                                                                Analyzer
                                                                                   or
                                                                                collectcr
Appendix
                                                                                Analyzer        EPA  Refe,ence Method,
                                                                                                Appendix  A
                                                                                Analyzer        A7-1
                                                                                Analyzer        EPA Equivalent  Method,
                                                                                                Appendix A
                                                                                Analyzer        EPA Equivalent Method,
                                                                                                Appendix A
Pestic'des
and other
serni vol ati 1 e
organi cs

Poly aromatic
hydrocarbons
and other
orqani c
pjrticul ate
constituents
Radon/
radon
progeny

borbant Collection/Laboratory Analysis--
Semi vol a ti 1 e organics are collected by
passing sample air through polyurethane
foam. In the laboratory, compounds are
extracted for chromatographic quanti tation.
Filter Col 1 ret 1 ^./laboratory An^tjsls--
CrqanTc" const" i "t'..l-n"tY~are colTecTeT~6y
passing sample air throu' h a suitable
filter. Organic constituent may be
quantified through a number of
chromatographic techni ques.
Filtration/Gross Alpha Count1ng--Rn
progeny collect onto a filter; consequent
alpha activity relates to working level.
Electrostatic Coll ectlor./Thermoluml nescent
Persinal
Portable
Stationary


Persona]
Portable
Stationary



Stationary


Stationary
Active
'Vcti ve
Active


Active
Active
Acti ve



Active


Passwe
Collector B
Collector
Collector


Collector B
Collector
Collector



Collector A8-2


Collector A8-1, .'8-6
DosTmetry^Rn passes into a specTal
cTiamKer Vhere subsequent progeny (Ions) are
electrostatically focused onto a thermo-
HrMncscent dosimeter (TLO) chip.
Subsequent alpha disintegrations create
rrtctastable defects 1n the TLD, which U
deactivated and quantified in the
1 ahoratory.

f>ab Sanjilp/Alpha Scintillation -Rn
proqVny coTlect Tn ~& fIItor"; T
-------
                                                          TABLE 4.  (concluded)


Pollutant


Operati ng


princf |ile
Persona) ,
p.v table.
or stationary
Active
or
passi ve
Analyzer
or
col lector
Rd Ion/          Filtration/Alpha  Spectroscopy  Couplerl           Stationary
r^ ion           to"T)^ct7os"U_cTc_ CcQTecTTpn /ATpha
pro'ieny         S^cc'troscopy-^n  pVogeny  (TonsT are
(continued)     colTecteiTon  a  filter;  subsequent alpha
                decay  relates  to  wording  level.   Rn
                passes  into a  special  chamber  where sub-
                sequent decay  ions  are  electrostatically
                focused onto  a  detector;  subsequent alpha
                d^cay  relates  to  R" ^,>Lt;iLrotior..

                t"llt_r^i':lnj.'!_AJH1A anfl ^ctl3 Spectroscopy--        Stationary
                P7r~pVc"«T"e"ny~Tre~"cbll eVte~d~~~on a  TTTter;
                subsequent  alpha  and L-eta activity
                relate  to working level.

                TRACK  ETCH~--Alpha-sensitive film               Stationary
                registers damagp  tracks when
                chemically  etched;  averagp  Rn
                concentration  is  related  to the
                number  of danage  tracks per unit area.

                Spr£tion/Garm_a_A_ct1v1 ty--Rn is                  Stationary
                a~3s"o?'&ird~bnto  acfTva»."ed* charcoal;
                subsequent  gamma  activity 1s
                related tc  average  Rn  concentration.
Active
Passive
Active
                                                                                                                          Appendi x
                                                                                                                       cross-reference*
                                                                                                  Analyzer
                                                                                                                  A8-4
              Analyzer         A8-5,  AS-7
              Collector        A8-8
              Collector        B
Sulfur          Flame  Photometric  Detection  (FPD)--             Stationary        Active
dioxide         HeTsuVenient  of  su1fur-specUfc~emiss1ons
                from hydrogen-rich air  flame.

                Pulsed Fluorescence--Measurement  of the         Stationary        Active
                uTtFn~s~Tty"oTl^e~in"t!-3violet fluorescence
                of  S02 etcUod  by  a  high-intensity  light
                source.
              Analyzer        EPA Equivalent Method
              Analyzer        EPA Equivalent Method







Volatile
orgamcs




Wet Chemical --SQ^ reacts with a reagent
sys^'em and is quantified conducto-
metrically or colorirretrical ly-
Electrochemical Oridation--Safnple air
passes Tnto an eTectrochemical cell where
oAJddtion of bO;> produces a signal
pr uijcrtioned to concentration.
Sorbant Col lection /Laboratory Analysis--
Volatile organics are cuTlc"~tccT~by
passing sample air through a suito'ulc
ahsorbant column. In the laboratory,
corpounds of interest arr desorbcd for
chromotographic quanti tatl on .
Stationary
Portable

Personal
Personal


Personal
Portable
Stationary



ActUe
Active

Ar ti ve
Passive


Active
Acti ve
Active



Analyzer EPA Equivalent Method
Analyzer A9-3

Analyzer A9-1
Analyzer A9-2


Collector B
Collector
Collector



  A or B denotes the appendix where  system  is  discussed;  the numbers following A show instrument summary number.

-------
     For Rn and Rn progeny, a variety of sophisticated monitors are available.
Many are small enough to be considered portable, but the measurement techniques
are most often geared to stationary measurements.  Two types of passive Rn
collectors are available—the TRACK ETCH"1 radon detector and two thermolumi-
nescent dosimeters.  In addition, a recently developed passive collection
method relies on adsorption onto caarcoal.

     As a class, organic vapors involve hundreds of chemicals, including
pesticides, and many methods of analysis.  Appendix 13 describes some common
broad-spectrum collection methods.

     Methods for coTlecting and analyzing biological  aerosols are discussed
in specialized references such as the following:

     •    Gregory, P.M.  1973.  Microbiology of the Atmosphere.   2d ed.
          John Wiley and Sons, New ''ork, \{7T~.     ~   '        ~~

Air Exchange Rates

     The continual transfer of air across the  building envelope is an impor-
tant determinant for indoor pollutant levels.   Air exchange results from one
of the following:

     •    Infiltration—the uncontrollable  leakage of air through
          cracks, joints, and pore spaces in the building envelope

     e    Natural Ventilation—deliberately augmented air exchange
          through the opening of do^rs, windows, and vents

     •    Mechanical Ventilation—reliberately augmented air
          exchange through the use of fans.

     In the absence of natural or mechanical  ventilation, the rate of air
infiltration is dependent on many factors such as type of structure, wind
velocity, orientation of the stricture, and indoor-outdoor temperature
di fferences.

     The quantification of air exchange rate^  generally relies on indirect
measurements.  General  methods, described in Appendix B, include fan pressur-
ization, tracer gas dilution, rnd measurement  of cracks.  Fan Pressurization
and Tracer Gas Dilution have b?en designated as standard practice by the
ASTM for evaluating infiltration rates on a single test basis.  The passive
method using the tracer gas dilution technique is also available.  The ASHRAE
crack method relies upon measurement of the lengths of cracks, such as those
around windows and doors, for calculation of air exchange.
                                     35

-------
     Users can measure air flow through mechanical  ventilation systems
with a variety of instruments and methods including visual  tracers (i.e.,
smoke releases), anemometers, and pi tot tubes.  Append-'xes  A and P do not
discuss this topic, but detailed procedures and instrument  descriptions
appear in the following publications:

     American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygiem'sts.
     1980.  Industrial Ventilation.  16th ed.   Committee on
     Industrial Ventilation, Lansing,  Mich.

     American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning
     Engineers.  1980.  ASHRAE Handbook--1977  Fundamentals.  New
     York, N.Y.         '   '     ~~'

Environmental Quantities

     Important environmental quantities in indoor air quality monitoring are
air temperature, humidity, wind speed  and direction,  solar  radiation,  and
barometric pressure.  Users can locate dealers for the required  measuring
devices through the catalogs and resource directories identified in the next
subsection.

KEY REFERENCES AMD OTHER INFORMATION  SOURCES

     References and information sources for instruments  and methods include
scientific literature describing fundamental technologies,  catalogs and
directories describing products, end  manufacturers' literature en individual
products.  Recognized sources of information in the scientific literature
include the following:

     »    Air Pollution.  1976.  3rded., Vol. Ill, "Measuring,
          Monitoring and Surveillance  of Air Pollution." A.C.
          Stern, ed.  Academic Press,  New York, N.Y.

     «    American Conference of Governmental  Industria   Hygiem'sts.
          1976.  Air Sampling Instruments for  Evaluation of Atmospheric
          Contaminants.  5th ed.Cincinnati,  Ohio.

     g    Linch, A.L.  1981.  Evaluation of Ambient Air  Quality  by
          Personal Monitoring,~VoT7T":""Gases and Vapors," and
          VoTTTT:  "Aerosols, Monitor Pumps,  Calibration,  and
          Quality Control."  CRC Press, Inc.,  Boca Raton, Fla.

     a    Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory, Environmental Instrumentation
          Groups.  Instrumentation for Environmental  Monitoring.
          University of California"Berkeley,  Ca~.(1st ed.  in 1972,
          with periodic updates).
                                     36

-------
     •    American Public Health Association.  1977.  Methods of Aj_r
          Sampling and Analysis.  2d. ed.  M. Katz, ed. "UasTmi'gTon,
          C'.C.         '

     Especially useful are tho professional journals that periodically
offer reviews and information on recent developments.  The Journal of the Air
Pollution Control Association, the American Industrial Hygiene Association
Journal, and Analytical Chemistry aTe examples.  TFcTse journals 'often refer to
additional literature on instruments and methods.

     Examples of consolidated catalogs include Pollution Equipment News,
published seven times a year, and Industrial Hy"gTene News, published six
times a year.  Reirbach Publication"of Pittsburgh, Pennsylvani,', circulates
both without charge to qualified subscribers.  Each catalog continually
updates a number of product lines, and an annual  buyer's guide cross-references
manufacturers by thoir products.  Some professional societies also publish
annual  directories "listing instrument manufacturers by their products.
Examples include the Directory and Resource Book from the Air Pollution
Control Association and the Guide to Scientific Instruments from the American
Association for the Advanceme7FtT~of Science.'

     Finally, many instrument manufacturers publish technical notes cover-
ing instrument operation, special applications, and other information.
Many references cited for individual instrument summaries in Appendix A
include such manufacturers' notes.
                                     37

-------
                                SECTION 5

                          DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
     When designing a monitoring program, the user must consider objc-ctives,
available technology, and resources.  An examination of objectives is especi-
ally important if the collected monitoring data are to fulfill the needs of
the program.  Indoor air quality monitoring programs typically fall under
either of two broad categories of study objectives:

     1.   To support applied research

     2.   To investigate problems associated with
          specific buildings.

     Examples of objectives  in the first category include comparing indoor
and outdoor pollutant levels, evaluating the impact of indoor source emissions,
and determining changes caused by weatherization.  The second category of
studies often occurs when occupants or a building complain of illnesses or
perceived health effects they associate with problems in indoor air quality.

     The two categories of studies are entirely different, at least in terms
of approach.  For the first  category of studies,  the current base of knowledge
permits the user to postulate the contaminants to be monitored.   If,  as an
example, an evaluation is needed of the impact of weatherization, monitoring
is considered for combustion gases, radon, and formaldehyde.  If a study is
aimed at source characterization, the selection of contaminants for monitoring
will be even more straightforward, because most of the source emissions
are known.

     In contrast, the determination of which contaminants will  be monitored
is an important part of an investigation of building-associated air quality
problems.  In an extreme case, the identification of problem contaminants
completes the investigation, and no monitoring program may be required.

     This section presents some preliminary considerations for those  who
investigate building-associated air quality problems.   In addition, ? methodo-
logical sequence useful  in designing monitoring programs is described.   This
metnodology is based on the  results of past research,  the current state of
knowledge, factors that affect indoor air quality, and available technology
for measurement systems,   lecause available resources  are an importont
consideration, this sectioi; points oul the need to consider resourced at
different stages in the design developrc-nt.   Some considerations for  \electing
the location of monitoring prob,:-s are riiscussed,  and examples of design
development are listed.

-------
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR INVESTIGATING BUILDING-ASSOCIATED PROBLEMS

     The investigation of building-associated problems often begins as a
result of reported illnesses, symptoms, or complaints about air quality.
In such cases, the ii^ediate reaction  is to conduct monitoring to identify the
causes or the contaminan+s responsible for health-related or air quality
problems.  Ye- experience shows that such a monitoring approach is seldom
useful.  The following points contribute io inconclusive investigations:

     t    Complaints by nature are subjective; hence, to sort
          out the useful informt'tion from possibly emotionally
          charged reports demands a systematic approach.

     «    Multiple etiologic factors, environmental factors, and
          even psychological factors may be responsible for complaints.
          Contaminants, if present, may be low-level and difficult to
          identify and to relate to health effects.

Thus, seemingly straightforward investigations of building-associated problems
become complex problems involving both people and their indoor environments.
An emphasis on either problem area will likely prove less than productive.

     The best approach in addressing such problen.s is to keenly observe
and gather facts related to both the physical  environment and people.  In a
practical sense, this  is the approach used by detectives who carefully
evaluate all factors that can provide a solution to the problem.  The relevant
factors to be examined may include the following:

     e    Building ventilation and air exchange

     •    Indoor sources and other physical factors

     o    Complaints

     •    Complainants.

M systematic evaluation of observations and facts will narrow the many potential
causes and help to pinpoint the problem.

     The first stage of the evaluation should include these steps:

     o    Examine complaints for validity, consistency, and diagnosis

     a    Evaluate the location of complaints to help determine the
          origin and source

     9    Collect information from persons with health complaints and
          compare descriptions with those who are unaffected
                                     39

-------
     e    Survey and evaluate ventilaVion systems including the
          location of exhausts with respect to intakes

     o    Survey unusual indoor sources or other physical factors
          and immediate outdoor environment that may cause the
          injection of contaminants into the indoor environment.

In general, no extensive measurements should be conducted, although
measurements of ventilation rates and v^nti^tion-related parameters such as
carbon dioxide may be appropriate in evaluating the ventilation systein.

     The results of these steps will narrow the scope of the investigation.
Once the possibilities are narrowed, the investigator can proceed in one of
two ways:  (1) use the collected information to alter possible conditions
related to the problem through a trial-and-error approach or (?) continue the
investigation and include the use of monitoring programs to pinpoint the
causes.  No further definitive guidelines can' be given, as the state of the
art in bui1 ding-associated problems is  not fully developed.  For more informa-
tion, however, investigators are encouraged to review a paper by Kreiss (1933)

METHODOLOGY FOR THE DEVELOPMENT OF MONITORING

     Figure 2 depicts the conceptual approach to developing a monitoring
design.  Although the figure shows nine steps, users may vary the order of
consideration or otherwise adapt the important design elements and their
relationships to their needs.

     Steps 1 through 4 in Figure 2 represent the design preparation stage.
Step 1 consists of selecting a preliminary list of pollutants to be measured.
Steps 2 and 3 are exploratory steps for reviewing available instrumentation
and developing broad options for1 sample sizes and location(s).  Various
factors that can influence the parameters used in equation (3) (Section 3) are
examined in Step 4, so that an initial  design can be developed.  This design,
as well as information from any previous studies, can assist in establishing
the sample size in Step 5.  Based on the results of previous steps, a prelim-
inary decision can be made on selecting typ^s of instrumentation in Step 6.
In Step 7, cost estimates should be prepared and compared with potential or
available resources.

     Often preliminary estimates will  exceed available resources; in such
cases, selection of pollutants, type and sophistication of instrumentation,
and sample size should be reconsidered.   This feedback loop, shown in Step 8,
can be repeated to align more closely the cost estimates and the available
resources.
                                     40

-------
|8
           Review
        Instrumentation
         Select Types  of
         Instrumentation
                                    Develop Monitoring
                                      Objectives  and
                                    Select Pollutants
                                      Develop
                                   Initial Design
  Determine
 Sample Size
                                   Define Sange of
                                  Sample Sizes and
                                Location(s) of Study
             Develop
          Cost Estimates
    Develop
Detailed Design
                                     Detailed
                                  Design and Cost
                                     Estimates
             Figure 2.   Schematic  flow  chart  'or  develon-ent of desiqn.

-------
     It should be re-emphasized that Figure 2 presents only a conceptual
approach,  and some steps may be unnecessary in some applications.  In certain
situations, some steps may require little effort, while others may require
significant effort beyond that described through page 54.  Following are
examples of steps that may require varying amounts of effort:

     •    Steps involving a range of sample sizes and locations may
          be based, at one extreme, on predefined objectives.  M
          the opposite extreme, these steps may require considerable
          effort.

     •    Although the figure shows only one feedback loop, feedback
          for both technical and cost considerations may be needed
          at many points in development of the design.

     •    For a study with limited scope and resources, steps such
          as those to update the review of available instrumentation
          and methods may not be undertaken.

     A brief discussion of each step depicted in Figure 2 follows.

Develop Monitoring Objectives and Select Pollutants

     The objectives of a study generally help define the pollutants to be
monitored.  Developing a clear statement of monitoring objectives is a
critical step in the design process because the objectives define both the
motivation and the goals of subsequent monitoring activities.  At first
glance, this step seems trivial because most study problems can be considered
synonymous with objectives.  However, the operative term here is the word
develop.  This involves a systematic interrogation or the problem setting,
the problem background, and the knowledge base needed to form both qualitative
and quantitative goals that are as specific as possible.

     Some  typical objectives are as follows:

     1.   To quantify relationships between indoor and outdoor
          air quality

     2.   To determine .he proportion of total  exposure that is
          attributable to indoor exposure

     3.   To assess the effect of weatherization on indoor air
          quality

     4.   To determine the causes of indoor air quality problems
          in residences or other buildings.

-------
For objectives 1 and 2, the study usually specifies the pollutants to be
monitored.  For example, a study with the first objective could consist of
quantifying the relationship between indoor and outdoor levels of particulates.
An example of objective 2 might be determining the extent of the nitrogen
oxide total exposure that is attributable to ir.door residential exposure.

     The long list of pollutants for study objective 3 includes radon and
formaldehyde, which have predominantly indoor sources and rate high on a list
of pollutants considered for monitoring.  Similarly, pollutants such as carbon
monoxide, nitrogen oxides, and particulates are present outdoors;  but they can
also have significant indoor sources.  Therefore, these two should also be
considered.  Volatile organics generated by the use of consumer products,
along with many other pollutants or pollutant groups, could also be included.

     Pollutants relating to objective 4 are not as obvious as those in the
three previous cases.  As described earlier, this type of study is aimed at
isolating causes and controlling indoor air quality problems in residences or
in other buildings, and a systematic approach outlined under "Design Considera-
tions for Investigating Building-Associated Problems" should be used before
the pollutants can be selected for monitoring.

Review Instrumentation

     For each pollutant under consideration, various aspects of available
measurement systems need to be reviewed.  A wide variety of available instru-
ments and methods with varying degrees of sophistication and associated costs
are reviewed in Section 4 and in Appendixes A and B.

     New instrumentation—especial ly personal  and portable devices--ij
constantly being developed, tested, and marketed.  Thus, the summary of
available instrumentation and methods contained in this document,  which was
prepared in late 1982, must be updated before users begin any major design
effort.   Reference sources for an expanded search are listed in Section 4.

Define Range of Sample Size and Geographic Locations

     An  evaluation of the approximate range of sample sizes early  in the
design plan can be useful in selecting instrumentation and in determining the
approximate extent of monitoring required.  Note that the emphasis here is on
range of sample sizes, not the actual sample size.

     The range is dependent on objectives.  For example, if the user envisions
a study  to develop models for seasonal,  time-varying concentrations of various
pollutants and energy-use patterns, then the number of houses can  be very
1imited--even as few as one or two.  This approach will permit extensive
measurements of various pollutant concentrations and air exchange  rates as
inputs to model  formulation and testing.  For this type of study,  fixed
instruments with active analytical  devices are the most suitable.
                                     43

-------
     The opposite extreme is a study that investigates the effects of weather-
ization in a large number of houses.  For a representative sample of several
hundred houses, less expensive passive instruments might be used if the
monitoring period is sufficiently long (e.g., 1 week or more).  However, tho
concentrations obtained with passivemonitoring will be averaged over the
duration of the monitoring period,  with no identification of short-term peaks.

     Also to be considered under the range of sample sizes are the location(s)
of the study and the type(s) of indoor environments addressed.  Often the
location may be stated in the objectives (e.g., assessment of the impact
of weatherization on indoor air quality in residences in the Pacific Northwest)
But in some cases, the study allows flexibility in the selection of appropriate
locationts).  Heating and cooling degree days, outdoor pollution levels, and
urban-versus-rural settings are among the factors that must be considered
in selecting geographic locations.

Develop Initial Design

     The output from Steps 1, 2, and 3 will  produce a list of probable pollu-
tants to be monitored, the available instrumentation, and the approximate num-
ber and location(s) of structures to be considered.  This list will serve as a
starting point for developing an initial  design, which requires consideration
of three major areas:  (1) selection of monitoring parameters, (2) frequency
and duration of monitoring, and (3) monitoring location and probe placement.
Examples of questions relating to design development in these three areas are
as follows:

     •    What other parameters (in addition to selected pollutants)
          should be selected for monitoring?

     •    Over wl'.at period of time  is the measurement for each
          parameter to be taken?

     •    Will monitoring take place throughout the year or
          only during selected seasons?

     a    Will monitoring occur on  all  days  of the week or only on
          selected days?

     e    Ca" average exposure be monitored  through passive techniques
          or must peak exposures be measured?

     e    If passive monitoring is  inadequate, will intermittent
          monitoring be sufficient, or is continuous monitoring
          required for meeting objectives?

     e    How many monitoring locations per  parameter and per
          structure are required?
                                     44

-------
 i                         «     Uhere  should  the  probes  be  placed?

                          e     Will measurements for different parameters be completely
1                               "independent,  or will  they  parallel  one another in some
                               systematic  way?
/
                          In  selecting  other parameters for measurement,  users  should examine the
                     mass  balance  equation in Section 3 for each  pollutant under consideration.
                     The  parameters that  determine  indoor  concentrations  of pollutants are Cout
                     (i.e., outdoor concentration),  v (air exchange rate), and  V (volume of the
                     structure).   These parameters,  in  addition to indoor concentrations,  can be
 >                    measured directly.   The S  (source  generation rate),  the X  (removal  and decay
                     rate), the f  (filtration factor),  and the in  (mixing  factors)  either cannot  be
                     measured directly  or  require  special  experimental  provisions,  such as chamber
                     studies  for S and  X  .  These  four  can be  quantified  through modeling  if
                     sufficient data  exist on parameters  that  can be monitored  directly.

                          Monitoring  frequency,  duration,  and  location  are partially  dictated by
                     study objectives  and  instrumentation  preferences.  For example,  a study of  the
                     effects  of weatherization on  participate  levels during wood stove operation
                     will  focus on th:  winter season.   Passive monitoring studies  will  require a
                     sufficient monitoring time  to  ensure  that minimum  detection levels are exceeded
                     Studies  of the effect of traffic patterns on residential CO levels might be
                     restricted to selected  hours  of the  day.   A  comparison of  concentrations from
                     two  experimental  homes—one tightened and the other  not tiahtened--wi11
v ;                    benefit  from  parallel  measurements.

 , ,  .                      An  additional consideration is  the manner in  which the initial  design
^S                 Tieets the  sample  size requirement.  The requirements may be met  in two ways.
'"i.                   One  is by  selecting  many units  (e.g., house?) and  sampling  each  one  for short
 t:                   pericds  of time  (e.g.,  1 day  or 1  week),  ana the other is  by  selecting only  a
  K                 few  units  and sampling  each for longer periods (e.g., i season or 1 year).
 ' »•'                  These two  approaches  are not  usually  equivalent.  In experimental  situations,
 .',                   the  latter option  often must  be pursued.   Otherwise, some  compromise  between
 / \                   the  two  extremes  may  be preferred.  As logistic considerations impact upon
•'  (                  this  decision, sample size  may  not be finalized until the  detailed design is
  \                 developed.
    i-
  .  r                 Determine  Sanple  Size

                          In  making the final determination of sample size,  the  preliminary
                     selection  of  equipment  and  previously estimated range of sample  size  will
                     serve as useful  starting points.   In  addition to specific  objectives  of the
                     monitoring design, the  sample  size (i.e., the total  number  of  air samples)
                     will  depend on the following  types of factors:

 -                         9     Pollutant(s)  to be moritored

                          9     Nature  of  structure(s)  to  be monitored
                                                          45

-------
     0    Area(s) of the country where monitoring is to take place

     o    Season(s) of the year during which monitoring is to take
          place

     e    Day(s) of the week on which monitoring is to take place

     o    Length of the time interval during which each sample is
          taken  (e.g., grab sample, 1-hour Sample, 24-hour sample).

     Estimates from previous studies of the average pollution 'levels and
variation around this average will  be helpful in making sample size estimates.
For the formulas presented below, preliminary estimates of the arithmetic
mean, "5T, and standard deviation, S, are required.  The sampling conditions
such as pollutant, structure type,  and measurement interval for previous
studies on which preliminary estimates are based should parallel  as closely
as possible the  conditions surrounding the contemplated monitoring program.
Unfortunately, in many instances there will be little or no information from
previous studies.  In these cases,  one will have to make some assumptions or
use best judgment as to expected levels and their variation.   If logistic
considerations permit, it may be prudent to apply a sequential  sampling
approach.  Under this scheme, estimates obtained from the early portion of
the study are used to refine the sample size for the latter part.

     Once preliminary estimates of 3T and S have been made, the required
sample size, N,  can be approximated.  The formula for sample size will  depend
on whether the study has estimation or hypothesis-testing goals.   A typical
estimation goal  is to estimate the average pollutant levels under prescribed
condition;, with  a stated degree of precision.  A typical  hypothesis-testing
goal is to compare pollutant levels from two differing sets of sampling
conditions (e.g., two different types of structures) in order to test whether
one of the conditions is associated with higher levels.  The chances of
arriving at incorrect conclusions on the basis of a statistical  test are
related to the chosen sample size.

     In the case of estimation goals, a common statement of desired precision
is as follows:   "We wish to have a 95 percent confidence that the average
level for the pollutant under consideration can be estimated within +10 per-
cent of its true value for the chosen sampling conditions."  The formula
for the sample size necessary to meet this objective is as follows:

                      N =
where     t rep.-esents the number of standard deviations (approxi-
            mately two) that account for the central  95 percent of
            the area under a normal  curve
                                     46

-------
          S is the standard deviation for the variable to be estimated

          d is the margin of error (i.e., 10 percent of the true value).

     The value for t in the above expression will vary with the confidence
level of choice.  Given a confidence level, the approximate value for t
can he found in an appendix of most statistical texts.  As stated previously,
best estimates of S ^nd Y are also required.  The ratio S/T varies with
sampling conditions but usually lies between 0.25 and 1.0 for CO, N02, and
TSP.  The ratio could be considerably larger for organic pollutants.

     If, for example, best estimates indicate that S/X"   0.5, then 0.5X can be
substituted for S in the above expression.  Because t = 2 and d   O.IT (i.e.,
10 percent of the mean value), the required sample size is estimated as
follows:


                     N = (2)2(0. 5^)2 = 4 x 0.25X?
                           (0.11)2       O.ODT2


Thus, for this hypothetical example, 100 air samples would be required in
order to achieve the desired precision.

     When two sets of sampling conditions are to be statistically con-
trasted, a t-test is commonly used to test the null hypothesis that their
concentration distributions arise from the same underlying distribution.
Sample size estimates can often be obtained from the t-test specification,
which has the following general form:
                                                                             (13)
where     YI and Xj are the mean concentrations for the two
                        sets of sampling conditions

          S is the standard deviation for the two sampling conditions

          n\ and r\2 are sample sizes for the two sampling
                        conditions.
                                     47

-------
     One important property of a statistical test  is  its power.  Th? power is
the probability that a statistical test will detect a true difference in
pollution levels for the two differing sampling conditions.  One minus the
power is the probability (p) of making a Type  II error, i.e., concHding that
two different sampling conditions have the  same underlying concentration
distributions, when in fact they do not.  The  power of a statistical test
increases as the size of the true, but unknown, difference between two sampl-
ing conditions increases.  The other type of error is a Type I error, i.e.,
concluding that two sampling conditions have different underlying distribu-
tions, when in fact they do not.

     Type I and II errors cannot be totally suppressed.  For a fixed sample
size, as u (probability of a Type I error)  decreases,  6 (probability of a
Type II error) increases, and vice versa.   Thus, the  sample size of choice
and the a and /3 levels at which a statistical  test is conducted are closely
intertwined.  Once two of these parameters  are specified, the third is
automatically determined.  When providing study results, it is custCT.ary to
report the level of significance (a level)  at which the statistical  test was
conducted.

     The a level for a statistical test should be specified before sampling is
initiated.  In choosing this level, one must carefully consider the anticipated
error associated with the a level and the sample size of choice.   Depending
on the situation, the consequences of Type  I errors, Type II errors, or both,
many be of genuine concern.   In the above formula, both ^ and S can be
expressed in relation to Y}.  Power curves  found in statistical  tests (e.g.,
Dixon and Massey 1969, p. 14) can be used to relate the Type I and Type II
errors associated with various sample sizes and assumed percentage differences
between ^2 and Y^.  The consequences of each type of error must be considered
in choosing a sample size that will yield tolerable error levels.

     The two cases provided in Table 5 as examples illustrate the  considerations
involved in choosing the appropriate sample size and level  of significance  for
statistical  testing.  For both cases,  it is assumed that 7Ti/S = 0.5.  In the
first case, a test is required to assess whether the two sets of sampling
conditions yield average pollution levels that differ by 25 percent or more.
If 100 measurements are taken under each condition, then both a (0.05) and  0
(0.06) levels can be kept low.  In the second case, a test to detect a smaller
difference (10 percent or more) is required.  In this case, 100 measurements
for each condition do not appear to yield acceptable error probabilities.
If 400 measurements for each condition are taken,  then u and /3  can  be equalized
H reasonably low levels (0.10 and 0.11,  respectively).   If the test is performed
at the 5 percent level of significance (i.e., a = 0.05),  then a /3 level  of
0.19 can be anticipated.

Select Tynes of Instrumentation

     Based on the review of instrumentation (Step 2), sample si^e  (Step 5),
and initial  design (Step 4), users can begin t<  select monitoring  instruments
methods,  and equipment.   This preliminary selection can yield a variety of
                                     48

-------
Table 5.  ESTIMATED a AMD  6  LEVELS ASSOCIATED WITH SELECTED SAMPLE SIZES
                 AND ASSUMED DIFFERENCES BETUEEN T  AMD Y"
Case 1.  Test to Detect Whether Y\ and X2 Differ by 25 Percent
Sample Size
                                     Error Probabilities
           50
           50
           50

          100
          100
          100
          50
          50
          50

         100
         100
         100
0.05
0.10
0.20

0.05
0.10
0.20
0.30
0.19
0.11

0.06
0.03
0.01
Case 2.  Test to Detect Whether

          Sample Size
          100
          100
          100

          400
          400
          400
         Hi

         100
         100
         100

         400
         400
         400
                         and X2 Differ by 10 Percent

                           Error Probabilities
0.05
0.10
0.20
0.05
0.10
0.20
0.70
0.59
0.44
0.19
0.11
0.07
                                     49

-------
equipment and methods for measuring air exchange and certain pollutants such
as carbon monoxide.  Therefore, users should consider the entire range of
personal, portable, and fixed monitors, as well as active versus passive
instrumentation, and all the associated cost advantages and disadvantages.

     A two-stage screening approach can streamline the selection process.
The first screening should concentrate on identifying measurement system^
that are compatible with the needs of the ;tudy.  The second screening
should concentrate on developing the cost of acquisition and operational
support.

     Figure 3 presents the minimum factors that should be included at the
first level of screening.  Minimum technical requirements include the
following:

     e    Instrument Mobility—With the use of the classification
          system introduced earlier, is the monitoring approach
          strictly limited to only one class of mobility (i.e.,
          personal, portable, stationary), or can two or even all
          three classes work as well?

     •    Lower seiectior. limit—Is the system sensitive enough to
          consistently measure the lowest levels potentially required
          by the problem?

     r    Range—Is response flexible enough to consistently
          measure concentrations above levels of concern?

     •    Reporting frequency — Is the output consistent with data
          needs (i.e., peaks versus time-weighted averages versus
          time series)?

     e    Unattended monitoring period—Does the instrument sample
          for sufficiently long tine intervals?

     The first screening level  pres.ents an important opportunity to adjust
the study design if problem parameters cannot be measured by available
technologies.

     Summaries of commercially available instruments and user-configured
methods are presented in Appendixes A and B  to aid in the first level  of
screening.  Instruments or methods, that meet or exceed criteria established
by the first screening level can J:hen be reviewed for compatibility with
technical resources.
                                     50

-------

Instrument/Method (reference from
Appendixes A and B)
1.1 Instrument Mobility
Personal
Portaole
Stationary
1.2 Lower Limit of Detection
Meets Requirements
Exceeds Reaui rements
Unacceptable
1.3 Range
Meets Requirements
Exceeds Requirements
Unacceptable
1.4 Reporting Frequency
Meets Requirements
Exceeds Requirements
Unacceptable
1.5 Monitoring Period
Meets Requirements
Exceeds Requirements
Unacceptable
Commercial ly
Avai lahle
Instruments






















User-Configured
Methods



















-


Figure 3.  Worksheet for first-level  screening  of  instrument  selection.

-------
     As sMwn in Figure 4, the minimum factors that should be considered at
the second screening level include the following:

     a    Acquisition costs—Are they acceptable?

     a    Staff resources—Are the currently available staff capable
          cf operating the equipment?  Is training feasible, or
          should the staff be augmented?

     •    Fccilities--Are the facilities adequate  to operate,
          repair, and calibrate the system,  or is  augmentation
          indicated?

     e    Permanence--Is it desirable that equipment have reliable
          service life after monitoring is complete?

     If two or more 'instruments emerge from  the screening with equal scores,
additional factors of performance (i.e., rise fime, zero and span drift), ease
of maintenance, and options can guide selection.

Develop Initial Cost Estimates

     Early in tlT3 design process, users will  find  it helpful  to develop
initial estimates of costs and other resource requirements.   The estimates
can be based on the total number of samples,  the  duration of each measured
parameter, costs of instrumentation and analysis,  study duration, costs of
labor, and other costs.  Users can later develop more detailed^ precise
estimates in Step 9.

Feedback

     Cased on initial projections of total costs,  the scope  of design can be
expanded or reduced to match available resources.   Often users will  need
to reduce the costs and, in turn, reduce the scope.  Some reduction  may be
achieved with a reexamination of assumptions and  needs for each of the nine
steps.  Alternatively, the feedback process  can be restricted to reevaluating
types of instruments (Step 6) and selecting  less  expensive types and numbers
of instruments.  If no changes to the preferred instrumentation package are
desired, the only way to reduce costs may be to accept a smaller sample size.
In some cases, it may be possible to expand  available resources to match the
desired scope.

     Finally, another type of feedback should be  an intagral  par1: of the
design.  This feedback relates to prompt analysis  of data collected  early in
a monitoring pragram.  The promptness of the analysis will  substantially
improve the chances of achieving the study objectives in a cost-effective
manner.
                                     52

-------

Instrument/Method
2.1 Acqui sition Costs
2.2 Staff Resources
» Technical expertise
acceptable
e Training indicated
e Staff preparation
indicated
2.3 Facilities
e Support equipment
adequate
9 Expansion indicated
2.4 Permanence
o Additional technical
inventory desirable
o Addi tional Lechnical
inventory undesirable
Coinmerci al ly
Avfli Table
Instruments
























User-Configured
Methods
























Figure 4.   Worksheet for second-level  screening  of  instrument  selection.

-------
Develop Detailed Design and Cost Estimates

     The detailed design for monitoring in Step 9 is the culmination of all
the preceding steps discussed in this section.  This step ties together the
instrumentation preferences and the sample size requirements.  The details
concerning the selection and enrollment of sampling units must be specified.
These details include the duration of monitoring for each sampling unit and,
by extension, the overall monitoring schedule.  These details will assist
users in assessing the logistics needed to accommodate the monitoring strategy,

     Cost estimates for personnel  will also be needed.  The following types  of
personnel may be required to implement the monitoring design and analyze the
resultant data:

     o    Field Staff
               Coord1' nators/managers
               Technicians/interviewers

     e    Laboratory Staff
               Laboratory scientists
               Laboratory technicians

     e    Office Staff
               Manager
               Environmental scientists
               Statisticians
               Computer programmers
               Scientific support personnel.

     Other potential cost elements for the design are as follows:

     e    Instrumentation

     o    Laboratory analysis

     a    Quality control and quality assurance

     o    Field travel

     9    Incentives for monitoring participants

     e    Data processing

     e    Forms and reports.

Uhcn sufficient design details (e.g., number and locations of sampling
units, duration of  sampling interval, and enrollment rates) are specified,  the
user can estimate cost elements with reasonable precision.
                                     54

-------
PROBE PLACEMENT

     The selection of a location for a prcie,  i.e.  the  point in the indoor
space where the sample is taken, is extre^ly  important in obtaining measure-
ments that will meet desired design objectives  previously discussed.  The
design objectives can be viewed from three general  perspectives:

     1.  To characterize levels of indoor pollutants  and to examine
         responsible factors

     2.  To quantitate exposure levels

     3.  To determine causes of indoo" air quality  problems.

     The first two are somewhat similar:   Pollutant characterization relates  to
determining "average" concentration for the air space under consideration,  and
exposure quantitation involves determining average  concentration  experienced
by an individual  occupying the air space.  The  third  is oriented  toward
identifying or assessing the causes of indoor  air problems, and thus average
concentration or average exposure is less important.  While probe placement
considerations can be discussed for objectives  based  on characterization  or
exposure, the current state of knowledge  limits similar considerations for
determining causes of indoor air quality  problems.

     Selecting the probe location is a two-step procedure.   The first step  is
to select a zone for monitoring, i.e., eilrer  a general  area  such as an upper
floor or rooms such as the kitchen or a becVoon.  The second  step is to
select a specific location within that zone.

     In characterization studies, the selertion of  zones may  be implicitly
specified in a study objective.  Even if  zones  are  not  specified, identifying
candidate zones is a fairly straightforward process.  It involves inspecting
each area for indoor sources associated with the study  objectives.   Concentra-
tions within a zone are dependent on sources pres°nt  in that  zone.   Thus,  if
the objectives include examining the impact of  specific indoor  sources,
then a zone that includes such sources will be  important.

     In studies involving occupied structures,  a parallel  interview or
questionnaire greatly aids in identifying a^ded factors that  influence
concentration levels.  These factors may  include potential  interferents
and habit patterns.  For exposure-based studies, the  selection  of indoor
monitoring zones is strictly tied to occupancy  patterns.   However,  if the
monitoring strategy entails personal  monitonng, probe  placement  considera-
tions may not be necessary.

     A preferred but more resource-intensive approach for zone  selection
is to conduct premonitoring surveys (Nagda ?nd  Koontz 1983).   In  these
surveys, simultaneous measurements of tracer gas decay  at a number  of indoor
locations are employed to examine zone-to-zcne  differences  in  air exchange
                                     55

-------
rates.   As summarized in Woods and Mai don:, do (1982) probe placement can be
guided  by ranking indoor zones in terms of air exchange characteristics and
indoor  sources.   One of the following cases will  often be encountered:

     e     Indoor zones that exhibit relatively lower air exchange
          rates  and that also contain indoor sources or communicate
          with zones that contain sources.  Such  zones will  tend to
          have relatively higher concentrations than other zones
          when indoor sources are active.

     t     Indoor zones that exhibit relatively lower air exchange
          rates  and that are generally isolated from indoor sources.
          Such zones are least influenced  by indoor sources  and
          would  also have a time lag under Lhe influence of outdoor
          concentrations.

     •     Indoor zones that exhibit relatively higher air exchange
          rates  that are also free of indoor sources.  Such  zones
          will be principally influenced by outdoor concentrations.

     e     Indoor zones that exhibit relatively higher air exchange
          rates  and that also contain (or  communicate with)  indoor
          sources.   Such zones will  be influenced by both indoor and
          outdoor sources,  though concentrations  attributable to
          indoor sources would be lower than in the first case
          above.

Based on specific objectives one or more such zones can be selected.   For
example, assessing influence of indoor source Case 1 above may be more
useful  than Case 4.  On the other hand, influence of outdoor sources  can  be
easily  quantified for Case  3.

     Once indoor zones have been identified,  probe locations may be selected,
Some guidelines  for selecting probe locations include the following:

     o     Avoid  exterior walls and corners

     e     Avoid  areas that  receive direct  sunlight

     9     Avoid  palpable drafts

     a     Avoid  direct influence of supply or return ducts

     e     Avoid  mounting heights below 3 feet or  above 5 feet

     «     Avoid  well-trafficked spots

     ©     Avoid  direct impact from sources.
                                     56

-------
     To determine the causes of indoor air quality problems where average
concentretion or average exposure are generally not important, some of the
above guidelines for selecting probe location may need to be revised or even
reversed.  For example, if the indoor air quality problem is known to exist
in one area served by an ?ir handling syjtem, a sample may need to be taken
in that area at a point directly influenced by the vents rather than at a
location not directly influenced by the vents.

     Finally, many indoor air quality studies require simultaneous measure-
ments of outdoor concentrations.  Probe siting criteria have been established
in this respect (EPA 1979).  However, such criteria may need to be selectively
compromised because indoor air quality studies focus on the nearby outdoor
air that infiltrates into the structure,  while most ambient outdoor monitoring
is concerned with the representation of a larger region.

ADDITIONAL READING

     A number of documents describe the design of various indoor monitoring
programs.  To more fully understand the discussion presented in this section,
users may refer to the documents listed below.  Because design documents are
not published as final reports, these may have to be obtained from the
respective organizations.

     e    CPSC Protocol for Indoor Air Monitoring Project at Oak
          Ridge National Laboratory.  1982.  Consumer Products
          Safety Council (Dr. K. Gupta),  Bethesda, Md.

     9    Research Triangle Institute.  1982.  "Workplan for the EPA
          FY82 Indoor Air Quality Research Program."  U.S.  Environ-
          mental  Protection Agency, Office of Research and Development,
          Washington, D.C.

     e    GEOMET Technologies, Inc.  1981.  Field Measurements
          Program for Residential  Indoor  Air Quality Impact of
          Bonneville Power Administration Regionwide Weatherization
          Program, Report ES-922,  Rockville, Md.

     t    Nagda,  N.L., M.D. Koontz, and H.E. Rector.  1982.   Uorkplan
          for Energy Use, Infiltration, and Indoor Air Quality7
          in Tight, Well-Insulated Residences.  Electric Power
          Research InstiiuteiFrepared by GFOMET Technologies,
          Inc., Rockville, Md.

REFERENCES

Dixon, W.J., and Massey, J.J., Jr.   1969.  Introduction to Statistical  Analysis
     McGraw-Hill  Book Company.  Mew York, HIT.
                                     57

-------
Kreiss, K.  "Building-Associated Epidemics,"  Chapter in  Indoor Air Quality.
     Editors P.J. Walsh,  C.S. Dudney, and E.B.  Copenhaver.   CRC Press.   Boca
     Raton,  Fla., in press.

Nagda, N.L., and M.D. Koontz.  1983.  Energy  Use,  Infiltration, and Indoor Air
     Qual i ty_ ^ n Tight Wei 1 -Insulated Residences--Some RTsul ts~o~f Prebaseline
     Mom'ton.1 j.  Prepared for Electric Power Research Institute.   Prepared by
     GEOMET Technologies,  Inc., Rockville, Md.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  1979.   Ambient Air Quality  Monitoring,
     Data Reporting and Surveillance Provision.  Appendix E:   Probe Siting
     Criteria for Ambient Air Quality.   Federal Register (44)92:27592-97.

Woods, J.E., and E.A.B. Maldonado.  1982.  De"°iopmentj)f a  Field  Method_for
     Assessing Indoor Air Quality in SingleT  : 'y Resi dences~Engineering
     Research Institute,  Iowa" State Universify. .^mes, Iowa.
                                     58

-------
                                 SECTION 6

                               DATA REPORTING
     Unfortunately, nm.h of the data collected in indoor air studies may not
have been preserved.  The organizations that sponsor studies generally lack
either the mandate or the resources needed to continue data management
activities when a _tudy ends.  Nor is there a central  clearinghouse to store
and disseminate the generated data.  As a result, the  only enduring record
lies in the literature in which accounts of the studies are published.  These
accounts may present only a part of the data base.

     Viewed from the narrow perspective of meeting  study goals,  the practice
of not preserving the entire data base is probably  satisfactory.   But when
viewed from the broader perspective of risk assessment and oroblem definition,
any loss of data is regrettable.

     This section provides general  guidelines for two  levels of  data reporting:

     e    LEVEL I—Meeting Obj.ctives of Specific Studies

     a    LEVEL I I—Preserving Data for Use in Other Studies.

LEVEL I REPORTING:  MEETING OBJECTIVES OF SPECIFIC  STUDIES

     Given the diversity of objectives and monitoring  approaches  for indoor
monitoring studies, it may be impossible to give a  detailed guide for reporting
data.  The difficulty is further compounded by continuing improvements in  our
understanding of factors responsible for indoor air quality.  The evolution
may require additional parameters to be included or different strategies to
be used for monitoring, and fixed data reporting formats may unnecessarily
hamper research progress.

     Although it is impossible to report all collected data, investigators
can follow minimum reporting requirements that might prove helpful  to others.
The minimum reporting requirements should address the  tests applied to the
data as follows:

     e    Descriptive Statistics—Means, standard deviations,  and
          histograms or cumulative frequency plots  are particularly
          important if nonparametric tests are used.  In all cases,
          the number of data points involved in any descriptive
          statistic should be clearly stated.

     e    Hypotheses to be Tested--Exact statements of the null  and
          alternative hypotheses will prove useful.

-------
     0    Test Statistics--A listing of test vali^s  for successful
          as well  as  unsuccessful  tests should be reported.

     «    Level  of Significance—The probability that a rejected
          null hypothesis is true  should be included in the  reported
          data.

LEVEL II REPORTING:   PRESERVING DATA FOR USE IN OTHER STUDIES

     In the absence of a central  repository lor indoor air quality  data,
a cooperative approach is needed  to ensure wider use of collected data.
Within this approach,  investigators should identify  the scope of collected
dsta in a common format.  The intent here is to provide a  means  of  rapidly
screening studies  for  useful content by other interested researchers.
Investigators can  then obtain more detailed information on those data  bases
of interest by contacting the principal  investigator of a  study.  The  investi
gatcrs wil.l, thus, maintain their  own actual  data sets, compensating for  the
lack of a common repository.

     A general descriptive format  for reporting scope and  content of data
bases, which will  accommodate a wide variety of indoor air quality  studies,
contains two separate  information  matrices.  The first format,  shown in
figure 5, offers a concise summary of key factors of the study  and  its
design.  The format organizes the  study information  useful for  screening  so
th?t a user can easily identify the general study approach and  the  types  of
data collected.   Most  important,  the format indicates the  availability of
those data.

     The format of the data base  content in Figure 6 enables  a  user to
further identify factors surrounding collection and  storage  of  data for each
parameter.  Thus,  for  each parameter, the following  information  is  made
available:

     e    PIacement--Number of fixed indoor, outdoor, personal,
          mobile,  or  portable devices

     •    Raw Data—Form of collection (i.e., strip  chart, data
          logger,  worksheet), collection frequency (i.e.,  continuous,
          hourly,  etc.), duration  (i.e., the number  of hours  of
          sampling),  and smallest  time increment (i.e., duration of
          individual  noncontiguous samples)

     »    Data Reduction—Principal  averaging period (i.e.,  hourly,
          24-hour, etc;  this may  be the same as the  "smallest time
          increment"  under raw data), and the number of data  points
          per average

     e    Data Storage—Raw field  records, worksheets, tabular
          summaries,  computer tape,  or active computer disk  files.
                                     60

-------
            TITLE:	.	

            PERFORMING ORGANIZATION:	  Principal Contact

            SPONSORING ORGANIZATION:  	  Principal Contact

            PERIOD  OF PERFORMANCE:	

            OBJECTIVES:	

            DATA RECORDS AVAILABLE UNTIL:
            TYPE OF .STUDY: f_]  Indoor Characterization       fj  Impact of Controls

                          Q  Emission Characterization     Q]  Modeling

                          Q  Exposure Characterization     f_J  Building Associated  Problems

                          Q  Impact of Weatherizatlon      P]  Other

            LOCATION(S):  	



            NUMBER OF STRUCTURES:  	Residences    	Offices   	Other buildings

            NUMBER OF STUDY  PARTICIPANTS:  	 Individuals

            AGE GROUP:  __  Adults  	 Children

            SUMMARY OF  APPROACH
            DATA SUMMARY

            1.  INSTRUMENTED MEASUREMENTS

                Q  Indoor Pollutants:  	

                    Outdoor Pollutdnts:
                    Indoor Environment (Temperature,  humidity, etc.)
                fj  Air Exchange:   __   Mechanical Ventilation:

                I  i  Energy  Consumption:  ^ _ ^ _ __

                P~  Meteorology:  __ _ _ __ __
            2.   ADDITIONAL  DATA COLLECTED

                rj  Architectural/Structural :

                f   Individujls' Profile:
                |	I  Activity  Patterns:  	

                Q  Complaints:  	

                |i  Interviews:

            STUDY PUBLICATIONS:
Figure  5.   Format for rcport'ing key factors  of an indoor air quality  study
              and i ts design.

                                               61

-------




















pj>~a^pter fi I nst rumen t
Designation






Placement



OJ

t. t. _a
0 O T3
O O +->

cr J-> o
-•- rj i — a.

-o c: OJ


-r- X 1- .0
4- T- O> O

O 0 0 0
0 0 O 0
•*• z ^





Raw data







o
u
OP


•o

QJ

i*-
>i
E
L
o_












u
c
QJ

CT






No.





Per













c
0


ro






No.





Time








GJ
E



-t-J C

QJ E
t— OJ
. — t,
nj (j





No.





Time





Reduced
data
c
01
13


Tl






C -r~

I- QJ
0. 0.



No.





Time





Storage and
retrieval

cu
en
i_






0.

to

c

0
OL

O
O
















en
ro

0

to
>^
E
"£
•^













en

<:

























Comnents





Nntes:
       R = strip chart, L = data  logger, W =  worksheet.
       C - continuous, S = second, H = hour,  D = day.
       I = i nactive/cnniputer compatible, A =  active/computer compatible, T = tabular summaries, X = rsw data only.
       P - proprietary, K = confidential, U = unrestricted.
       M = paper copies only,  0 = computer compatible.
                                Figure  6.   Format for reporting  scope  of  data  collectioi. and storage.

-------
Each format fits on a single page, so that it is easy to handle, store, and
disseminate.

     The data base sumnary describing scope and content should becoine an
integral part of publications anil proceedings of symposia.  This cooperative
system would assist other users of the data bcSi  and help them recognize
available data.
                                     63

-------
                                 SECTION 7

                   QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL


     Quality assurance (QA) and quality control (QC) are measures used to
ensute that procedures, equipment, personnel, and all other components
of a monitoring program produce data of acceptable reliability.  QC refers to
routine procedures that ensure a reliable measurement process, while QA
addresses the overall operations including planning, assessment, and corrective
actions.

     Both QA and QC provisions are implemented through a QA plan.  The
plan specifies in detail  the manner in which a particular project or continu-
ing operation will achieve predetermined goals of data quality.  Often, a
policy or regulation w' 11 require a QA plan.  Even if a QA plan is not
formally required, however, the process of developing a nlan will force
an investigator to review every aspect of operations in an orderly manner,
thus strengthening the approach and resultant dat:,.

     The EPA hat published a document to guide in preparing QA plans:

     U.3. Environmental Protection Agency.  1980.   Interim Guide-
     lines and Specifications for Preparing Quality  Assurance
     Project Plans. ~~EPA QAMS-005/80, Office of Monitoring SyTtems
     and Quality Assurance, Office cf Research and Development,
     Washington, D.C.

This document presents the principal  elements of QA  plans for environmental
measurements and covers all aspects of indoor air quality monitoring.   The
following description, c'rawn largely from the EPA document, sumnarizes the
elements of a QA plan.  This section also presents examples of QA plans
prepared for two different EPA projects.

ELEMENTS OF A QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

     A quality assurance 01 an is a document composed of 16 items, as follows:

      1.  Title page, which includes provision for signatures
          indicating approval of the plan by the cognizant project
          manager, QA officers, and sponsoring organization

      2.  Table of contents

      3.  Project description

      4.  Project organization and responsibility

      5.  QA objectives
                                     G4

-------
      6.  Sampling procedures

      7.  Custody procedures

      8.  Calibration procedures

      9.  Analytical procedures

     10.  Data reduction and reporting

     11.  Internal QC checks

     12.  Performance and system audits

     13.  Preventative maintenance

     14.  Assessment of data quality

     15.  Corrective actions

     16.  Quality assurance reports to management.

     Generally all these items apply to indoor air quality monitoring studies.
Many of the items are self-explanatory; other items—such as QA objectives,
custody procedures,  internal QC checks, performance and system audits,
assessment of data quality, corrective actions, and OA reports—are discussed
briefly below.

Quality Assurance Objectives

     For each measurement variable, QA objectives should be defined in terr,.s
of the following:

     o    Accuracy,  i.e., the degree of agreement of a mea-
          surement wi^h an accepted reference or  true value

     •    Precision, i.e., a measure of mutual agreement among
          individual measurements under prescribed conditions

     *    Completeness, i.e., a measure in percent of the amount of
          valid data recovered, as compared with expectations

     e    Representativeness, i.e., an expression of the degree to
          which data accurately and precisely represent key charac-
          teristics  or conditions

     e    Comparabil_i_ty_, i.e., an expression that defines the degree
          oT c o n fTrfe no e" w i t h which one data set can be compared
          with another.

-------
Custody Procedures

     Custody procedures, primarily used when many samples are involved,
clearly document the paths taken by all relocatable elements.  A relocatable
element is any item that affects the final data product, such as sample
media, primary data, and reduced data records.  Where appropriate, each
relocatable element receives a unique identity, including serial number,
date, time, and location.  A log documents the movement cf the element among
various points of custody--technical  personnel, files,  and storage.  Such
tracking, which provides safeguards against data loss,  is particul e.rly useful
in determining sources of contamination or other adverse factors that might
jeopardize the quality of data.

Internal QC Checks

     Internal QC checks consist of periodic testing of  equipment performance
and assessment of procedures.  For approaches relying on sample collection
and laboratory analysis, the following types of checks  should be considered:
(1) replicates, (2) spiked samples, (3) split samples,  (4) blanks, and
(5) reagent checks.  The QC checks should be applied to all  procedures and
equipment for direct reading instruments and should include  either use of a
standard reference for challenging the device or colocating  a portable
reference analyzer for comparing the readings.

Performance and System Audits

     Investigators should periodically conduct performance audits to determine
the accuracy of the total measurement system and its individual  components.
Most aspects of a peformance audit are similar to those of the internal QC
checks except that performance is verified through  standards, devices, and
personnel, which are independent of the routine project organization and
equipment.

     Systems audits consist of a qualitative evaluation of the facilities, equip-
ment, training, procedures, recordkeeping, data validation,  and reporting
aspects of the total monitoring approach.   This evaluation provides a measure
of the capability to perform within QA objectives.

     Both performance and systems audits should precede initial  data collection.
Thereafter, the frequency of audits would be dictated by policy, objectives,
and resources.

Assessment of Pata Quality

     For each major measurement parameter, the OA plan  should address routine
procedures to assess precision, accuracy,  and completeness of the accumulating
data.  The results of the assessment must be continually tested against QA
objectives.
                                     66

-------
Corrective Action

     Corrective actions are  the  systematic  response to errors, malfunctions,
and other deficiencies.  Corrective actions may stem from the  following:

     »    Excursions of data quality to unacceptable levels

     •    Results of internal QC checks

     »    Results of performance or systems audits.

The QA plan should stipulate procedures to  be followed in correcting a
deficiency.  Regardless of the size of the  deficiency or actual need for
corrective action, three steps must be followed:

     1.   Analysis—To determine potential  causes, extent of
          negative impact on accumulated  data, and reasonable
          corrective actions.

     2.   Adjustment--To transmit corrective steps to cognizant
          personnel, to adjust affected data, to label the data as
          questionable, or to discard.

     3.   Report—To document the entire  corrective operation
          in the permanent records.

Qualify Assurance Reports

     The QA plan should include  provisions  for periodic reports on systems and
data quality.  Such reports  should include  the following:

     •    />sse.5sment of accuracy, precision, and completeness

     e    fe-ults of performance and systems audits

     •    Significant problems and solutions.

Such reports may be required on  a predetermined schedule or solely in response
to problems or special  events.

EXAMPLES OF QUALITY ASSURANCE PLANS

     The investigator may find it useful   to review QA plans prepared for
other studies.   Below are two exemplary documents:

     a    Research Triang^  Institute.  1981.  Total  Exp_ps'j_re
          Assessment Metnodology (TEAM) Study:  PTTase 11/Fart'III:
                                     67

-------
          Qualjty Assurance Project Plan.  Prepared under Contract
          iJo. 68-02-3679, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
          Research Triangle Park, N.C.

     This document is a model  example of an operational QA plan.  It follov/s
closely the EPA guidelines and specifications.  The plan is directed toward
field sampling and laboratory analysis; but many, if not all, the items in the
QA plan apply to uirect field and/cr laboratory measurements as well.

     9    Battelle Columbus Laboratories.  1982.   Qual1ty Assurance
          Plan for Control Technology Assessment and Exposure
          Profile for Workers Exposed to Hazards in the Electronics
          Component Industry.Prepared under Contract No. 68-03-3026,
          U.S.  Environmental  Protection Agency, Columbus,  Ohio.

     This is another model QA plan prepared for a study, jointly funded by
EPA and NIOSH,  to assess human exposure to air pollutants  on a 24-hour-a-day
basis.  This study will be conducted in the electronic components industry.
The NIOSH portion of the study is concerned with assessing worker exposure
from job-related activities.   The EPA portion is concerned with the more
 •biquitous a^'r pollutants to which people--in this case, electronics industry
'"•.-rkers--are continually exposed.  The document presents the QA plan for the
EPA 24-hour exposure study.

-------
                                Appendix A

                         SUMMARIES CF INSTRUMENTS
INTRODUCTION
     This appendix reviews commercially available instrumentation suitable
for indoor air quality monitoring.  As defined in Section 4, instruments are
as follows:

          1.    Mobil , v,y
               - Personal
               - Portable
               - Stationary

          2.    Power Requirements
                 Active
               - Passive

          3.    Output Characteristics
               - Analyzer
                 Collector

These terms  can be assembled to form 12 distinct instrument categories such
as PERSONAL/DASSIVE/COLLECTOR and STATIONARY/ACTIVE/ANALYZER.   Key performance
characteristics of these instruments are summarized within a format derived
from an extensive survey of environmental  monitoring instrumentation begun by
the Lawrence  Berkeley Laboratory in the 1970s.   Where there was no information
available for certain characteristics such as  "lagtime"  as in  case of ECOLYZER
Model 2000,  the entry was left blank.   A glossary  defining key instrument
terms appears at the end of this appendix.

     In offering this appendix, the intent is  primarily  to summarize alter-
natives among PERSONAL, PORTABLE, and STATIONARY instruments for each pollutant.
This was not  possible for some pollutants (Table 4).   Appendix B summarizes
approaches that can fill some of the voids.

     In response to the National Ambient Air Quality Standards, a large
number of STATIONARY/ACTIVE/ANALYZERS are available for  carbon monoxide, nitrogen
dioxide, sulfur dioxide, and ozone.  Instruments for these pollutants that appear
on the EPA-designated list of reference and  equivalent methods for these pollu-
tants are listed in a subsection of this appendix.

INSTRUMENTS

     The following pages present sumnaries of  35 measuring instruments and
3 data logging devices.  In the majority of  the  cases, individual summaries
have been reviewed by manufacturer representatives.   price information cited
in this appendi < is current to late i?32 and subject to  change.
                                     £9

-------
                    ASBESTOS AND OTHER FIBROUS AEROSOLS
                         PORTABLE/ACTIVE/ANALYZER
                                          1-1
                                          GCA FAM-1
                                          Fibrous Aerosol Monitor
                                          1 of 3
                                              Weight:  11.4 kg

                                              Dimensions:  53 x 35 x 20 cm
Principle of
Operation:
Lower Detectable
Limit:

Range:

Interferences:

I1u1 ti parameter
Capabili.y:
Induced osc'"11 ;t;c'1/optical scattering.  Sample air
passes th.'Oigh a lami^r flow chamber and enters a sensing
region where an oscillati;,? ^lectric field induces fiber
oscillations.  The sensing region is illuminated by a
continuous wave He-lJe laser that is aligned with sample
flow.  Scattering pulses from fiber oscillation are
detected by a photomultiplier positioned at right angles to
the laser.  Electronic circuitry applies four separate
acceptance tests to discriminate fibers, producing fiber
counts per cubic centimeter.
0.001 fibers/cm3; minimum detectable fiber length:
minimum detectable fiber diameter:  0.2 urn

0.001 to 30 fibers/cm3

Large concentrations of elongated particles
Fiber counts only
2 urn;
                                     70

-------
                                                              1-1
                                                              GCA FAM-1
                                                              Fibrous Aerosol Monitor
                                                              2 of 3
Performance:
Operation:
Sampling Rate:   2  1/min  (adjustable  1.5 to 2.5 1/min),
                 continuous; fiber counting and selectable at
                 1, 10, 100, and 1,000 minutes

Accuracy:  equal to reproducibility when calibrated for
           specific fibers

Reproducibil ity:   (one-sigrna) +(100/N)%, (where N is the
                   number of fiFers counted)

Linearity:  +5%  of count

Noise:

Lagtime:  <0.5 seconds

Rise Time:  0

Retention Time:  detection period - approx. 50 milliseconds

Fall Time:  0

Zero Drift:

Span Drift:

Temperature Range:   0° to 50° C

Temperature Compensation:  none

Relative Humidity Range:   0^ to 95% for conductive fibers
                          303, to 95% for dielectric fibers

Calibration:  factory set or field adjustable through
              comparison  against NIUSH asbestos fibers
              method

Warm-Up Time:   5 minutes

Unattended Period:   indefinite

Maintenance:  occasional  cleaning  of optics
                                     71

-------
Features:
Costs:
Manufacturer:
References:
                                         1-1
                                         GCA FAM-1
                                         Fibrous Aerosol Monitor
                                         3 of 3

Power:  115 or 220 V a.c.,  50 or 6C Hz;  or may be run off
        battery power pack

Output:  6-digit LCD;  recorder output

Training:  1 hours

Options:  battery power pack; digital to analog interface
          (recoroer output)

FAM-1:  $10,850
Battery power pack:  $720
Digital analog interface:  $830

GCA Corporation, Technology  Division, Environmental  Instrument^
213 Burlington Road
Bedford, Massachusetts 01730

(617) 275-5444

Speci fications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin--9-30 cp 2.5M

    2.  L'ilienfeld, P.  1979.  "Development of a Prototype
        Fibrous Aerosol  Monitor."   Am.  Ind. Hyg. Assoc.  J.
        4:270.                                    '"

Operations experience

    1.  Elias, J.D.  1981.   "Dry Removal of Asbestos."
        Am. Ind. Hyg.  Assoc. J.

    2.  Page, S.J.  1980.  Correlation  of the Fibrous Aerosol
                             Monitor with the Optical  Membrane Filter Count
                             Techm'quFIU.S. Department of the InterTor,  Bureau
                             of Mines Report,
Remarks:
A standard inline membrane  filter permits concurrent
collection of fiber samples
                                     72

-------
                             BiOLOGICAL AEROSOLS
                         STATIONARY/ACTIVE/COLLECTOR
                                         2-1
                                         AUDERSCN
                                         #10-800 VIABLE
                                         SAMPLE KIT
                                         1 of 3
                                              Weight.:  1.5kg

                                              Dimensions:  20 x 11 cm
Principle of
Operati on:
Impaction.  Upon entering the inlet, sample ai-" is acceler-
ated througn a series cf six impaction stages, each of which
holds a petri  dish containing agar,  which serves as trie col-
lection surface.  Within each stage, jet velocity is uniform
but increases  in each succeeding stage.   Each successive
stage collects the larger particles  remaining in the air
stream.  Microbial colonies are incubated for 24 hours and
counted manual ly.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
Range:
Interferences:
Multi parameter
Capabi1ity:
                                     73

-------
Performance:
Operati on:
                                                               2-1
                                                               ANDCRSEIj
                                                               y/10-8UO VIABLE
                                                               SAMPLE KIT
                                                               ?. of 3
Sampling  Rate:   28.3  1/min,  continuous

Accuracy:

Reproducibility:

Li n;arity:

lloise:

Lagtime:

Ri se Time:

Retention Tine:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift:


Temperature Range:

Temperature Compensation:

Relative Humidity Range:

Calibration:

Procedure:

Warm-Up lime:

Unattended Period:  usually <60 minutes (see remark

Mai ntenance:

Power:   115 V a.c.
                                     74

-------
                                                              2-1
                                                              ANDCRSEN
                                                              #10-80U VIABLE
                                                              SAI1PLE KIT
                                                              3 of 3
Features:
Costs:


Manufacturer:
Output:

Training:  recommended

Options:


#10-800 Viable Sampler Kit (including pump and case):   $2195


Andersen Samplers, Inc.
4215 Wendell  Drive
Atlanta,  Georgia  30336

Toll free:   (800) 241-6808

In Georgia:   (404) 691-1910
References:
Speci h'cations

    1.   Manufacturer's bulletin
                     Operations experience

                         1.  None avai1able
Remarks:
Sample periods for biological  aerosols are generally
less than 60 minutes to avoid  dehydration of collected
microorganisms.

Available time did not permit  review of this summary
by a manufacturer's representative.  Pricing information
has been verified by telephone.

-------
                             BIOLOGICAL AEROSOLS
                         STATICNARY/ACTIVE/COLLECTOR
                                          2-2
                                          ANDERSEN
                                          r?l 0-850 TWO-STAGE
                                          M1CROBIAL SAMPLER
                                          1  of 4
                                               Wei gilt:   1.5 kg

                                               Dimensions:   20 x  11  cm
 Principle  of
 Operati on:
Impaction.  Upon entering the inlet, sample air is acceler-
ated through a series of two inpaction stages, each of which
holds a disposable petri dish containing agar, which serves as
the collection surface.  The first stage collects particles
larger than 7 urn.  The second stage collects particles
between 1 and 7 urn.  Microbial  colonies are incubated for
24 hours and counted manually.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
Range:
Interferences:
Multiparameter
Capabi"! i ty:
                                      76

-------
Performance:
Operati on:
                                                      nuous
                                         2-2
                                         ANDERSEN
                                         #10-850 TWO-STAGE
                                         MICROBIAL SAMPLER
                                         2 of 4


Sampling Rate:   28.3 1/min, conti

Accuracy:

Reproducibi1ity:

Linearity:

Noise:

Lagtime:

Rise Tine:

Retention Tine:

Fall Tire:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift:


Temperature  Range:

Temperature  Compensation:

Relative Hunidity Range:

Calibration:   none  required in ordinary use (see remark

Procedure:
                                     77

-------
Features:
Costs:


Manufacturer:
Refprences:
Remark?:
                                                              2-2
                                                              AUDEKSEN
                                                              #10-850 TWO-STAGE
                                                              MICROS IAL SAMPLER
                                                              3 of 4
Warm-Up Time:

Unattended Period:  usually <60 minutes (see remark #2!

Maintenance:

Power:  defined by user-supplied vacuum source


Output:

Traininq:  recommended

Options:


nO-850:  $850


Andersen Samplers, Inc.
4215 U'endell Drive
Atlanta, Georgia  30336

Toll Free:  (800) 241-6898

In Georgia:   (AQ4) 691-1910


Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

Operations experience

    1.  Mono available
A critical  orifice situated in the base of the sampler
provides constant flow of 1 CFM as long as vacuum is
10 inches of Hg.

Sample periods for biological  aerosols are generally
less than 60 minutes to preclude dehydration of col-
lected microorganisms.
                                     78

-------
                                         2-2
                                         ANDERSEN
                                         #10-850 TWO-STAGE
                                         MICROBIAL SAMPLER
                                         4 of 4
The sampler uses disposable 100-mm petri dishes and is
reusable and sterilizable.

Available time did not permit review of this summary
by a manufacturer's representative.  Pricing information
was verified by telephone.
                 /9

-------
                              CARBON MONOXIDE
                         PORTABLL/ACTIVE/AIJALYZER
                                         3-1
                                         COOLYZER
                                         Me del 2000
                                         CO Monitor
                                         1 of 4
                                              Weight:  4.5 kg

                                              Dimensions:  17.8 x 17.8 x 33 cm
Principle of
Operati on:
Electrochemical  oxidation.   Ambient air is drawn past a
catalytic-lily active electrode where CO is oxidized,
producing a signal  proportional  to the CO concentration
in the sample air stream.   Potential interferents can be
removed by an inlet scrubber.
Lower Detectable
Li flirt:
<0.5 ppm
Range:
0 to 100 ppm, 0 to 600 ppm
                                     80

-------
                                                              3-1
                                                              ECOLYZER
                                                              Model  2000
                                                              CO Monitor
                                                              2 of 4
Interferences:
                           ECOLYZER
                 Carbon Monoxide Specificity*
Concentration
Interfering Gas Tested (ppm)
CH4 (Methane)
COj (Carbon Monoxide)
Nil] (Ammonia)
NO (Nitric Oxide)
NOp (Nitrogen Dioxide)
(120 (Citrous Oxide)
C?H2 (Acetylene)
C?H4 ( Ethyl ene)
C2H6 (Ethane)
C3H8 (Propane)
H2 (Hydrogen)
HpS (Hydrogen Sulfide)
S0~2 (Sulfur Dioxide)
50,000
10,000
500
50
25
100
5
10
10
100
LO
50
100
Reading on Scale
(ppm)
fJo
No
No
No
No
No







interference
interference
interference
i nterference
interference
interference
15
10
0.10
1.0
0.5
0.5
1.0
                        Tested with interference filters
Mill tiparameter
Capability:
The model  7000 version of the instrument allows anv  two
of the following to be paired in the same chassis:   CO,
N02,  NO,  and H2$.   While it would be attractive to
pair CO and NO^ for indoor air quality monitoring, the
N02 monitor of the 200 series nay be of limited use
under current specifications because the most sensitive
range is  0 to 2 ppm.
                                     81

-------
performance:
Operation:
                                                              3-1
                                                              LCOLYZER
                                                              Model 2000
                                                              CO Monitor
                                                              3 of 4
Sampling Rate:  700 nil/min, continuous

Accuracy:  +_!£

Reproducibility:  +1%

Linearity:  1%

Noise:  +0.2%

Laqtime:

Rise Tine:  approximately 2o seconds

Retention Time:

Fall Time:  approximately 25 seconds

Zero Drift:  
-------
                                                              3-1
                                                              ECOLYZER
                                                              Model 2000
                                                              CO Monitor
                                                              4 cf 4
Features:
Output:  0 to 100 ppm CO, 0 to 600 ppm CO panel
         meter with paralax mirror; 0- to 1-volt
         d.c. recorder output

Training:  none required for sampling

Options:  d.c.-powered recorder
          a.c.-powered recorder
Costs:
Model 2000 CO monitor:  $1,900
DC recorder:  S550
AC recorder:  S450
Manufacturer:
Energetics Science, Inc.
6 Sky!ine Drive
Hawt'iorne, New York  10532

(914) 592-3010
References:
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

Operations experience

    1.  Cortese, A.D., and J.D. Spengler.   1976.   "Ability
        of Fixed Monitoring Station to Represent  Personal
        Carbon Monoxide Exposures."  J.  Air Pollut.  Control
        Assoc. 26:1144-50.
Remarks:
Low temperature (0-10° C)  zero dr-'ft was round to be
+lto-27 of scale over 30 minutes;  calibration drift was
<1 ppm (Cortese and Spenger 1976).
                                     83

-------
                              CARBON MONOXIDE
                         PERSONAL/PASS IVE/ANALYZER
                                         3-2
                                         ESI 210
                                         Personal CO Monitor
                                         1 of 3
Principle of
Operation:

Lower Detectable
Li nit:

Range:

Interferences:
                                              Weight:   0.3 kg

                                              Dimensions:   14 x 8.5 x 3.8 cm
Electrochemical.  Ambient air diffuses into a
patented, three-electrode electrochemical  cell

1 ppm
0 to 1999 ppn
                                        Concentration
                                      Necessary to Yield
Interferent Tested
Methane
Carbon Dioxide
Ammonia
Nitric Oxide
Nitrogen Dioxide
Sulfur Dioxide
Hydroqen S'll fide
Acetyl ene
Ethyl ene
Ethane

Propane
Methanol
Ethanol
Propanol
Concentration
Tested
99%
99.8%
29 A ppm
48.2 ppin
387 ppm
21.2 ppm
27.2 ppm
100 ppri
19.4 ppm
50 ppm, 500 ppm

105 ppm
500 ppm
500 ppm
500 ppm
1 ppm Equivalent
CO (ppm)
No interference
No interference
135
No response
270
145
130
170
135
1200 (no response
at 50 ppm)
425
No response
140
750
                                     84

-------
Multiparameter
Capability:
Perfornance:
Operati on:
                                                              3-2
                                                              ESI 210
                                                              Personal CO Monitor
                                                              2 of 3
CO only


Sampling Rate:  diffusion, continuous

Accuracy:  +5% or +_! ppm  (whichever is greater)

Reproducibil ity:  +2°; or +1 ppm (whichever is greater)

Linearity:

Noise:

Laqtime:

Rise Time:  16 seconds to 50 ppm, with a 200 ppm exposure

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:  <5 ppm/24 hr

Span Drift:  +2%/24 hr or 2 ppm/24 hr (whichever is greater)


Temperature Range: 0° to 40° C

Temperature Compensation:

Re'ative Humidity Range:   5% to 90%

Calibration:  standard gas mixture

Warm-Up Time:

Unattended Period:

Maintenance:  batteries field replaceable;
              6-rnonth sensor warranty

-------
Features:
Costs:
Manufacturer:
References:
Remarks:
                                                               3-2
                                                               ESi  21U
                                                               Personal  CO  Monitoi
                                                               3  of 3
Power:  standard lj-vol t transistor battery


Output:  LCD pi'str button-activated or continuous display

Training:  none req"ired for sampling

Options:  lapel ciip-on alarm norr, for high noise areas


Model 210:  $695
Energetics Science Division of De:;ton
  Dickinson and Company
Six Sky!ine Drive
Hawthorne, NCJW York  10532

(914) 592-3010
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's brochure 2C-10-1-82

Operations experience

    1.  None available


A similar version is available for
                                     36

-------
                              CARBON MOiJOXIDE
                         PERSONAL/ACTIVE/ARALYZER
                                         3-?
                                         l-t!OAL ELECTRIC
                                         CO DETECTOR
                                         1 of 5
                                              Weight:   290 g

                                              Dimensions:  7.5  x  13.5 x 3.6 cm
Principle of
Operation:
Electrochemical oxidation.  Air is drawn through a filter
and into an electrochemical cell in which oxidation of
CO produces an electrical signal proportional to CO
concentration in the ai*1 stream.
Lower Detectable
Limit:               1 ppm
Range:


Interferences:
0 to 1COO pprn
(with Purafil  filter installed!
                     Interferent
                        Gas
                     Uater Vapor
                     02
                     CH4
                     C02
                     UG
                     N02
                     S02
                     HZ
                     C2H2
                     H2S
                     C2H4
                     Electromagnetic
                       (0-80 MHz)
                   Concentration
                      In Air
                   50% to 100;,
                   L6% to 20C:
                   i?
                   ^ j
                   1%
                   50 ppm
                   10 ppm
                   25 ppm
                   100 ppm
                   100 ppm
                   10 ppm
                   100 ppni
                   3 volts/neter
   Equivalent
CO Reading (ppm)

       0
       0
       0
       0
       0
       0
       0
       2
      16
       0
      18
   ;!o effect
                                     87

-------
                                                              3-3
                                                              GENERAL ELECTRIC
                                                              CO DETECTOR
                                                              2 of 5
Multiparameter
Capability:

Performance:
CO on I;,

Sampling Rate:  60 ml/min, continuous

Accuracy:   direct LCD readout, 0 to 500 ppm
                                500 to 1000 ppm + 1K

            accumulator, 0 to 10 ppm/hr +2 ppm hr
                         10 to 500 ppm/h? +10% 8 hr TWA
                         500 to 1000 ppm/hr +15% 8 hr TWA

Reproducibi 1 ity:   _+5"

Repeatibil ity:  +J>%

Linearity:   0 to 500 ppm +10%
            500 to 1000 ppm +15%

Noise:  <0.c> ppm

Lag Time:  6 seconds

Rise Time:   <45 seconds

Response Time:  within 2 minutes to 90%

Retention Time:  6 seconds

Fall Time:   <40 seconds

Zero Drift:  very little, if any (usually +1 pprn over
             several  days)                 ~

Span Drift:  generally ^5 ppm at 60 ppm span gas if
             several  da7s elapse
Operation:
Temperature Range:  1° to 40° C (freezing conditions
                    should be avoided)
                                     88

-------
                                                              3-3
                                                              GENERAL ELECTRIC
                                                              CO DETECTOR
                                                              3 of 5
                     Temperature Compensation:   fully  compensated over the
                                                range  1°  to 40°  C
                     Relative Humidity Range:
                             to 95% RH
                     Calibration:   standard  gas  mixture

                     Unattended Period:   10  hours  (4  hours  with light and alarm
                                         on;  starting  with  a  fully charged bat-
                                         tery).  Unattended sampling may be
                                         greatly extended  by  running off battery
                                         charger if normal  a.c. power is avail-
                                         able  (Model  CO-3  only).   See remarks
                                         below to  extend unattended period of
                                         operation.

                     Warm-Up Time:   3 minutes  (after  14-hour  charge cycle)

                     Maintenance:   purafil filter:  renew  upon color change
                                   cell  assembly:  replenish  distilled or
                                                  de-ionized water periodically
                                   storage conditions:   1°  to 50°  C

                     Power:   5.2 V  d.c., 250 ma-hr, rechargeable  Ni-Cd
Features:
Output:  LCD p-?ne1  readout (instantaneous levels)
         recorder output 0 to  1  '/  d.c.
         internal accumulator  (requires external  console to
           read out;  see options)

Training:  none required for sampling

Options:  support console (to  read/reset accumulator)
          gas calibration kit
          charger
Costs:
Direct indicating detector:   31,195
Support console:  S7",E  (single  charge);  S935 (mul ticharge)
Gas calioration kit:   S245
Charger:   S29
                                     89

-------
                                                              3-3
                                                              GENERAL ELECTRIC
                                                              CO DETECTOR
                                                              4 of 5


Manufacturer:        General Electric Company
                     333 West Seymour Avenue
                     Cincinnati, Ohio  45216

                     (513) 948-5050


References:          Specifications

                         1.  "Operation and Maintenance Instructions, Direct
                             Indicating SPE Carbon Monoxide Detector."  GE
                             Aircraft Equipment Devices, 1980.

                         2.  "Model 15ECS1C02 Carbon Monoxide Dosimeter
                             and Model 15ECS3C03 Direct Indicating Carbon
                             Monoxide Detector for Performance and Instrinsically
                             Safe for Classss I and II, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups
                             A,  B, C, D,  E, F, and G Hazardous Locations."
                             J.I. 1A7AO.   Ax (6340/3610) Factory Mutual
                             Research,, 1151 Boston, Providence Turnpike,
                             Norwood, Massachusetts  02062.  November 1979.

                     Operations  experience

                         1,  Flachsbart,  P.G., and W.R. Ott.   (In preparation).
                             Field Surveys of Carbon Monox.ue in Commercial
                             Setting^ Using Personal Exposure Monitors.
                             For U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

                         2.  Nagda, U.I. ,  and M.D. Koontz.   1983.   Exposures to
                             Carbon Monoxide.  Final Report No.  EHF-1200, for
                             "Electric Power Research Institute.    GEOMET
                             Technologies, Inc., Rockville, Md.

Remarks:             These units may be leased from the manufacturer.

                     Alternative support  consoles are available  from
                     additional  sources;  see entries under  Data  Logging.

                     The unattended period has been extended  to  well  over
                     35 hours by substituting a larger capacity  battery
                     (see reference 2 listed under operations experience).
                                     90

-------
                                         3-3
                                         GENERAL ELECTRIC
                                         CO DETECTOR
                                         5 of 5
Tiiese units have been approved by the follov/ing
organizations:

Mine Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department
of Labor-  Pen.iissible Carbon Monoxide Detector,
Tested in Methane—Air Mixtures Only, 'Approval
2G-3152-1.

Factory Mutual System.  Approved for Performance and
Intrinsically Safe for Classes I and II, Divisions 1 and 2,
Groups A, B, C, D, E, r, and G.
                91

-------
                              CARBON MOI.'OXIDE
                         POKTA3LE/ACTIVE/ANALYZER
                                          3-4
                                          INTERSCAN
                                          CO  1140  and 4140
                                          1 of  3
                                              Weight:  3.6 kg  (Model  1140)
                                                       2.0 kg  vModel  4140)
                                              Dimensions:
                                       18.4 cm  x  1.5.2  cm  x
                                        29.2 mrn  (Model  1140)
                                       17.8 x 10.2  x
                                        22.5 cm  (Mode'  4140)
Principle of
Operation:
Electrochemical.  Gas molecules from the moving  sample
Hi r stream pass through a diffusion medium and are
adsorbed onto an electrocatalytic sensing electrode where
subsequent reactions generate an electric current.  The
diffusion limited current is linearly proportional to CO
concentration.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
Range:
I'-', of fu i 1 scale
0 to 100 pprri, 0 to 250 ppn, 0 to 500 ppm (other ranges
available)
Interferences:
Expressed as ppm ~>f interferent needed to give 1 ppn
def1ection:
                     H2S:   >500
                     NO:    >500
                     H2:     125
                          MeSH (Methyl rcercaptan):   100
                          EtSI, (Ethyl mercaptcn):    100
                                     92

-------
Multi parameter
Capability:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              3-4
                                                              INTERSCAN
                                                              CO 1140 and 4140
                                                              2 of 3
                     S03)  NO, N20, flH3, Me^S, C02, and saturated
                     hydrocarbons show no interference.  Unsaturated hydro-
                     carbons require a special filter when present in concen-
                     trations equivalent to CO.
CO only


Sampling Rate:   1.2 1/min, continuous

Accuracy:  +2% of fu'll scale

Reproducibility:  _+0.5%

Linearity: +1% of full scale

Noise:

Lagtime:  <1 second

Rise Time:  20 seconds

Retention Time:

Fall Time:  20 seconds

Zero Drift:   +1% full  scale in 24 hours

Span Drift:   <+2% full scale in 24 hojrs


Temperature  Range: 10° to 120° F

Temperature  Compensation:  integral

Relative Humidity Range:   l°L to 100/1

Calibration:  si  ndard gas mixture

Warn-Up Time:  <5 minutes

-------
Reworks:
                                                              3-4
                                                              INTERSCAN
                                                              CO 1140 and 4140
                                                              3 of 3
                     Unattended ?eriod:  10 hours on battery power

                     Maintenance:   calibration, battery replacement, biannual
                                   sensor replacement

                     Power:  1140:  4 Alkaline Mn02 batteries for amplifier,
                                    2 iH-Cd for pun., s and pov/er-on LED, 1 HgO
                                    battery for bias amplifier reference

                             4140:  No HgO batter^  is used; four "1/2C" IM-Cd
                                    used
Features:
Output:  0-100 mV full scale

Training:  none required for sampling

Options:  alarms, special ranges
Costs:


Manufacturer:
Model 1140:  SI,675
Model 4140:  51,895

InterScan Corporation
P.O. Box 2496
21700 Nordhoff Street
Chatsworth, California  91311

(213) 882-2331
TEIEX:   67-4897
References:
Speci fications

    1.   Manufacturer's bulletin

Operations experience

    1.   Ziski'nd, R.A., et al .   1981.  "Carbon Monoxide
        Intrusion into Sustained-Use Vehicles."  Envi ron.
        Int.  5:109-23.                          ——
                                     94

-------
                              CARBON MONOXIDE
                         PERSONAL/PASS I VE/Al.'UYZER
                                         3-5
                                         INTERSCAN
                                         5140
                                         1  or  3
                                              Weight:   680 g

                                              Dimensions:   15'c x 76 x 51 mm
Principl e of
Operati on:
Diffusion/Electrochemical.  Carbon monoxide diffuses
into an electrochemical cell, producing a signal pro-
portional to CO concentrations.  The signal  is digitized,
incorporated into 1-ninute averages, and stored.  Nonde-
structive recovery of each 1-minute average is accomplished
through a separate data reader.  Data storage capacity
is 2,048 1-minute averages.
Lower Detectable
Limit:                2.5 ppm
Range:


Interferences:
0 to 1,000 ppm
Expressed as ppm of interferant needed to give 1 ppm
deflection:
                     H2S:   >5UO
                     NO:    >500
                     Ho:     125
                          tleSH:   100
                          EtSH:   100
                     S03,  NO,  MpO,  IIH;,  HepS,  COe,  and  saturated
                     hydrocarbons  show no interference.   Unsaturated hydro-
                     carbons  require  a special  filter when  present in concen-
                     trations  equivalent to trose  of CO.
                                     95

-------
Multi parameter
Capability:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              3-5
                                                              INTERSCAN
                                                              5140
                                                              2 of 3
CO only


Sampling Rate:   diffusion, continuous

Accuracy:  +_2^  of  reading, _+!  least  significant digit  (LSD!
           +0.5% of  full  scale

Reproducibil ity:  _+!"  reading, +1 LSD

Linearity:   0.5* reading, + 1 LSD

tioise:

Lagtime:

Rise Time:   20  seconds

Retention Time:

Fall Time:   20  seconds

Zero Drift:  +1% reading, _+! LSD in  24 hours

Span Drift   + 1% reading, +1 LSD in  24 hours


Temperature Range:    30° tc 120° F

Temperature Compensation:

Relative Humidity Range:  1% to 100?:

Calibration:   standard gas mixture

Warm-Up Time:  <5 minutes

Unattended Period:    up to 34 hours

Maintenance:   calibration, battery replacement, sensor
              renlacement

-------
                                                              3-5
                                                              INTERSCAN
                                                              5140
                                                              3  of  5
                     Power:   long-life  9-volt  battery  (alkaline
                             NEDA  type  1604A);  battery  life  is  125 hours
                             continuous operation
Features:
Output:  printout from data reader (see remark ?1!

Training:  none required for sampling
Costs:


Manufacturer:
$1,145; $275 for calibration meter
InterScan Corporation
P.O. Box 2496
21700 Uordhoff Street
Chatsworth, California  91311

(213) 882-2331
TELEX 67-4897
References:
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

Operations experience

    1.  None available
Remarks:
Data readout is accomplished by a device available from:

        Metrosonics, Inc.
        P.O. Box 23075
        Rochester, New York 14692

        (716) 334-7300

InterScan has also recently introduced the
Kodel  2140 CO persona!  monitor that offers
an LCD display of concentration instead of
data logging.
                                    97

-------
                               FORMALDEHYDE
                        PERSONAL/PASS IVE/COLLECTOR
      n-^TS^Tf^s^sas^^l r
                                         4-1
                                         Ai r Qua! ity Researcii
                                         PF-1
                                         HCHO passive monitor
                                         1 of 4
                                              Weight:   negligible

                                              Dimensions:   90 x  25 mm (diameter)
Principle  of
Operation:
Lower Detectabl e
Limit:
Sorption/colorimetry.   The sampler consists of a glass-fiber
filter treated with sodium bisulfite, housed in" a glass
vial  that is  capped when not in use.  Formaldehyde
diffuses through the tube at a rate dependent upon Pick's
First Lav/ of  Diffusion.  The treated filter at the bottom
end of the tube maintains a near-zero formaldehyde
concentration at the base; therefore, the quantity of
formaldehyde  transferred through tne diffusion path is
related to the ambient concentration and the length of
time exposed.  Collected formaldehyde is quantified in
the laboratory using the chronotropic acid procedure.


1.68 ppm-hr (0.010 ppri for 1-week exposure)
Ranne:
Validated over the range of 0 to 150 ppm-hr.  Capacity
established to be in excess of 1,000 ppn-hr.

-------
Interferences:
Multiparameter
Capability:
Pe~formance:
Operation:
                                                              4-1
                                                              Air Quality Research
                                                              PF-1
                                                              HCHO passive monitor
                                                              2 of 4
None known at this time.  The analytical  procedure
(chroniotropic acid)  is subject  to  interference by
several compounds, but they are  seldom encountered  in
indoor air quality sampling applications.   In any event
the compounds are not expected  to  b^ collected by the
bisulfite-treated filter collection element.
HCHO only


Sampling Rate:  4.1 ml/min, continuous

Accuracy:

Linearity:

Noise:
Reproducibility:  +_25%

Rise Time:  on the order of seconds

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift:


Temperature Range:

Temperature Compensation:  none required for 15° to 35° C

Relative Humidity Range:  noncondensing

Calibration:  static laboratory standards (see third
              reference under specifications)
                                     99

-------
                                                              4-1
                                                              Air Quality Research
                                                              PF-1
                                                              HCHO passive monitor
                                                              3 of 4
Features:
Unattended Period:  1 week (recorrmended minimum exposure
                      for indoor studies)

Power:  none

Output:  laboratory report

Training:  none required for sampling

Options:
Costs:
Sampler only:  S15 for box of 2
Sampler plus analysis:  $30 for box of 2

NOTE:  These are nominal  prices; actual  costs
       depend upon lot sizes.
Manufacturer:
Air Quality Research, Inc.
901 Grayson Street
Berkeley, California  94710

(415) 644-2097
References:
Specifications

    1.   Manufacturer's bulletin

    2.   Geisling, K.L., et al .   1981.   "A M:*/ Passive
        Monitor for Determining Formaldehyde in Indoor
        Air."  Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory Report No.
        LBL-12560.   Presented  at the International
        Symposium on Indoor Air Pollution,  Health and
        Energy Conservation, Amherst,  Massachusetts,
        October 13-16, 1981.

    3.   National  Institute for  Occupational  Safety and
        Health.  _M_enual of Analytical  Methods.   2d ed.
        1:125-1 to  125-9"
                                     100

-------
                                                              4-1
                                                              Air  Quality Resources
                                                              PF-1
                                                              HCHO passive monitor
                                                              4 of 4
                     Operations experience

                         1.  None available

Remarks:              These devices do not require specialized training
                     for use.  However,  extreme care must be exercised in
                     proper placement in the field and recordation of the
                     exposure interval.   The units should be exposed  at
                     least in immediate  pairs at each sampling point.
                     Therefore, a simple indoor/outdoor comparison,  for
                     instance,  would require four samplers.

                     Though not yet formally validated under field
                     conditions, trie sampler is coming into  extensive
                     use.   The  Canadian  government is using  the
                     device in  an extensive ongoing study examining
                     formaldehyde levels in several  tens of  thousands of
                     homes with urea formaldehyde foam insul at.-'on.
                     Published  results were unavailable at press  time.

                     Shelf life of the PF-1 has been validated for at least
                     2 months.
                                     101

-------
                               FORMALDEHYDE
                        PERSONAL/PASSIVE/COLLECTOR
                                         4-2
                                         0(1 POUT
                                         PRO-TEK
                                         HCHO passive
                                         dosimeter
                                         Type C60
                                         1 of 4
                                              Weight:   17.8 g

                                              Dimensions:   7.6 x 7.1  x 0.89  cm
Principle  of
Operation:
Sorption/col >_rimetry.   Collection relies on molecular
diffusion to deliver sample air to a liquid sorbent
solution at a constant rate.  After exposura, the
sorbent is analyzed in a laboratory spectrophotometer
for formaldehyde content and the time-weighted average
concentration.  A maximum exposure time has not been
defined, although laboratory validation exposure times
varied from 2 to 18 hours.   The shelf life of exposed
badges is 2 weeks, suggesting this to be a maximum
exposure time.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
l 6 ppm-hr (0.010 ppm for 1-week exposure'/.
Range:


Interferences:
1.6 to 54 ppm-hr.
Free of interferences from n-butanol ,  ethanol,  toluene,
and phenol.
                                     102

-------
Multiparameter
Capability:
Performance:
Operati on:
                                                              4-2
                                                              DU PONT
                                                              PRO-TEK
                                                              HCHO passive dosimeter
                                                              Type C60
                                                              2 of 4
HCHO only


Sampling Rate:  diffusion, continuous

Accuracy:  +13.1%  (overall system accuracy) over the
           range of  1.6 to 54 ppm hrs.

Precision:  5.9%

Reproducibility:

Li nearit":

Noise:

Lagtime:

Rise Time:  2.6 seconds (calculated)

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift:


Temperature Range:    4° to 49° C

Temperature Compensation:

Relative Humidity Range:

Calibration:   laboratory standards

Unattended Period:    2 to 18 hours

Maintenance:
                                     103

-------
                                                              4-2
                                                              DU PONT
                                                              PRO-TEK
                                                              HCHO passive dosimeter
                                                              Type C60
                                                              3 of 4
Features:
Power:  none required for

Output:

Training:  see remark #2

Options:
Costs:
Type C60, .10 per box:

    1-10 boxes:  $222 (Order Code 5147)
   11-25 boxes:  S201 (Order Code 5148)
     26+ boxes:  $160 (Order Code 5149)
Manufacturer:
E.I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co. (Inc.)
Finishes and Fabricated Products Department
Applied Technology Division
Bailey Mill Plaza, Marshall Mill Building
Wilmington, Delaware  19898

(302) 772-5989
References:
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's sampling and analytical  procedure.

    2.  Kring, E.V., et al.   "A New Passive Colorimetric
        Air Monitoring Badge for Sampling Fonialdehyde in
        Air."  Submitted to  Am. Ind.  Hyg. Assoc.  J.  for
        puM ication.

Operations experience

    1. None available

-------
                                                              4-2
                                                              DU PONT
                                                              PRO-TEK
                                                              HCHC passive dosimeter
                                                              Type C60
                                                              4 of 4
Remarks:              Each badge carries two compartments of sorbant solution--
                     one for sampling,  the other (thoroughly r.ealed until
                     analysis)  acts as  a blank.

                     Du Pont does not plan to market this device directly
                     to homeowners because of the absence of professional
                     supervision to ensure accuracy for sampling results.

                     An analytical service for exposed badges is availablf
                     from a number of AIHA-accredited laboratories.

                     Shelf life of the  dosimeter is as follows:

                         Unevoosed:  6  months refrigerated (40°  to 45°  Fy,
                                     3  months unrefrigerated (up to 78° r)

                         Exposed:  2 weeks refrigerated, 2 weeks unrafrigerated.
                                     105

-------
                               FORMALDEHYDE
                         PERSONAL/PASSIVE/COLLECTOR
                                         4-3
                                         3M
                                         Formaldehyde Monitor 3750
                                         1 of 3
                                       \
                                              Weight:

                                              Dimensions:
Principle of
Operation:
Sorption/spectrophotometry.  Formaldehyde, diffuses into the
monitor and is collected by a chemisorption process onto
an impregnated media.  At a constant sampling rate, the
                     amount of formaldehyde  adsorbed  is
                     tration and  exposure  time.   At the
                     monitor is  sealed  and taken  to the
                     collected formaldehyde  is  desorbed
                     quantitated  spectrophotonetrically
                     received formaIdehyde is linearly
                     weighted-average exposure.
                                   controlled by concen-
                                   end of sampling,  the
                                   l?ooratory where
                                   using water and
                                     The weight of
                                  related to the time-
Lower Detectable
Limit:
0.8 ppm-hr (0.005 ppm for 1-week exposure)
Range:
Up to 72 ppm-hr
Interferences:
Phenol, a^ohols, and unsaturated compounds at 10 to 20 times
the formaldehyde concentration
                                     106

-------
Multiparameter
Capability:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              4-3
                                                              3M
                                                              Formaldehyde Monitor 3750
                                                              2 of 3
HCHO only

Collection Efficiency:  1.00+0.04


Sampling Rate:  65.9 +2.1 ml/min or 4.88 ug/ppm-hr, continuous

Accuracy:  <+25%; exceeds OSHA accuracy requirements

Reproducibility:

Li nearity:

Noise:

Lagtime:

Rise Time:

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift:


Temperature Range:  -20° to 130° F

Temperature Compensation:   none required

Relative Humility Range:  15% to 95%

Calibration:   laboratory standards

Unattended Period:  up to 1 week

Pow^r:  none  required for sampling
                                     107

-------
                                                              4-3
                                                              3M
                                                              Formaldenyde Monitor 3750
                                                              3 of 3
Features:
Output:  laboratory report

Training:  none required for sampling

Options:
Costs:
3750 (sampler plus analysis at 3M):  $35
3751 (sampler only):     S21
Manufacturer:
Occupational Health and Safety Products Division/3M
220-7W, 3h Center
St. Paul ,  Minnesota  5*5144

(612) 733-6234
References:
Remarks:
Specifications

    1.   Manufacturer's brochure

    2.   Rodriguez, S.T., P.B.  Olsen, and V.R. Lund.
        "Colorimetric Analysis of formaldehyde
        Collected on a Diffusion^!  Monitor-"
        Technical bulletin R-AIHA5(71.1)R, 3M Company,
        St. Paul, Minnesota.

Operations experience

    1.   None available


Shelf life for the Formaldehyde Monitor is as follows:

    Unexposed:  1 year at room temperature
    Exposed:  4 weeks at room  temperature
                                     108

-------
                               FORMALDEHYDE
                         PORTABLE/ACTIVE/ANALYZER
                                         4-4
                                         TGM 555
                                         FORMALDEHYDE ANALYZER
                                         1 of 3
                                              Weight:   14 kg

                                              Dinensions:   51  x 41  x  18  cm
Principl e  of
Operation:
Automated wet chemistry/colorimetry.  Sample air is drawn
through a sodium tetrachloronercurate solution that
contains a fixed quantity of sodium sulfite.  Acid bleached
pararosaniline is added, and the intensity of the resultant
color is measured at 550 nn.  Reagent handling and processing
Is automatic.
Lower  Detectable
Limit:
0.002 ppm
Range:
Interferences:
0 to 5 ppm (with optional
multiplied by a factor of
0 to 0.15 ppm full  scale

None
stream  splitter range can be
10 or 100);  adjustable from
                                     109

-------
Hultiparaneter
Capabi1ity:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              4-4
                                                              TGM 555
                                                              FORMALDEHYDE ANALYZER
                                                              2 of 3
Collection Efficiency: 98*


Sampling Rate:  500 ml/min, continuous

Accuracy:  +_3% (referenced to Chroraotropic Acid Procedure)

Reproducibility:  1%

Linearity: <2\ up to 3 ppn

Noise:  +0.2" (zero noise)

Lagtime:  4.5 minutes

Rise Time:  4 minu+es to 90%

Retention Time:

Fall Time:  4 minutes to 90%

Zero Drift:  <2% in 24 hours

Span Drift:  <2% in 24 hours

Air Flew Drift:   <1% in 24 hours


Temperature Range:  60° to 80° F optimum; 40° to 120° F usaole

Relative Humidity Range:   5% to 95%

Calibration:  with  liquid standards or HCIIO permeation tubes

Warm-Up Time:   20 minutes
                                     110

-------
                                                              4-4
                                                              TGM 555
                                                              FORMALDEHYDE ANALYZER
                                                              3 of 3
Features:
Unattended Period:   18 hours on fully charged batteries

Maintenance:  pump tubes changed once a month

Power:  12 V d.c. unregulated, 4 watts
        115/230 V a.c., 50/60 Hz


Output:  digital panel meter
         0 to 1 V at 0 to 2.0 ma recorder output

Training:  none required for sampling

Options:  stream splitter (to multiply range)
Costs:
TGM 555:  $5,410

Stream Splitte~:  $295
Manufacturer:
CEA Instruments, Inc.
15 Charles Street
Wes',wood, New Jersey  07675

(201) 664-2300
References:
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

Operations experience

    1.  Matthews, T.E., and T.C. Howe!i.   1981.  "Visual
        Colcrimetric Formaldehyde Screening Analysis for
        Indoor Air." J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc.
        31:1181-84.   '     ~~    '
Remarks:
A new calibration gas generator,  the SC-100 which
operates at 100° C using HCHO permeation tubes, is now
available for dynamic gaseous calibration of the
TGM 555.
                                     131

-------
                       INHALARLE PARTICULATE MATTER
                        PERSONAL/PASSIVE/ANALYZER
                                         5-1
                                         CCA MINI RAM
                                         Aeroscl Monitor
                                         1 of 4
                                                    Weight:   0.4 ky

                                                    Dimensions:   10 x 10 x 4 cm
Principle of
Operation:
Optical Scattering.  Sample air passes through the
open serving volume by free convection.  A pulsed
neer-infrared emitting diode, in combination with a
silicon detector with an interference filter, senses
for'v/srd light scattering (centered at 70° +25°).
Lower Detectable
Limit:
Scattering coefficient of approximately lO'^
(mass equivalence is tied to reference dust)
Range:


Interferences:
0.01 to 100 mg/m3 (auto-ranging 0-10, 0-100)
Extreme ambient light fluctuations
Multiparameter
Capability:
Particulate matter, liquid or solid readings only
                                     112

-------
                                                              5-1
                                                              GCA MINI RAM
                                                              Aerosol  Monitor
                                                              2  -f 4
Performance:
Operation:
Sampling Rate:  open convection, continuous

Accuracy:  if calibrated for specific aerosol, equal to
           reproducibility

Reproducibility:

    +0.05 mg/m^ for 10-second measurement
    +0.02 mg/m^ for 1-minute average
    +0.006 rng/m^ for 10-niinutes average
    +0.003 mg/m^ for 1-hour average

Linearity

Noise:  _+0.05 mg/rn^ for 10 second measurement

Lagtine:  digital  readout, 10 seconds
          analog output, 0.5 seconds

Rise tine:  digital readout, 10 seconds
            analog output time constant, 0.2 seconds

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift:


Temperature nange:   0° to 50° C

Temperature Compensation:   electronic

Relative Humidity  Range:  0\- to 95%

Calibration:   automatic zero reference in clean environment,
              optional  reference scatterer, or gravimetric
              reference calibration
                                     113

-------
                                                              5-1
                                                              GCA MINIRAM
                                                              Aerosol  Monitor
                                                              3 of 4
                     Warm-Up Time:  1 minute

                     Unattended Period:  at least 3.5 hours with battery

                     Maintenance:   occasional  cleaning or replacement of
                                   slide-in sensing chamber

                     Power:  internal  rechargeable 7.5-volt battery;  charger
                             operates from a.c. line
Features:
Output:  3-digit LCD (updated every 10 seconds)
         0- to 2-volt analog recorder output; digital
                     Training:  none required for sampling

                     Options:   Miniature strip chart recorder,  zero  check
                               filter air unit, personal  filter sample  adaptor,
                               respirator/face mask monitoring  adaptor,
                               shoulder strap, table stand,  extra  battery  pack
Costs:
MINIRAM:  51,445 (includes charger/a.c.  line adaptor,
          instrument/accessory case,  manual)
Recorder:  SI,170
Personal sampler adaptor:  $250
Respirator adaptor:  S150
Zero check unit:  $260
Shoulder strap:   $25
Table stand:  $25
Manufacturer:
GCA Corporation
Technology Division, Environmental  Instruments
213 Burlington Road
Bedford Massachusetts  01730

(617) r>it :vi-4
                                     114

-------
                                                              5-1
                                                              GCA MINI RAM
                                                              Aerosol Monitor
                                                              4 of 4
References:
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

    2.  P. Lilienfeld.  1982.  Fina". Report, to the Bureau
        of Mines on Contract No. H0308132.

    3.  P. Li 11'enfeld.  "Current Mine Oust Monitoring
        Instrumentation Developments."  Proceedings of the
        1981 International Symposium on Aerosols in the
        Mining and Industrial Work Environment. .To be
        published in 1983.

Operations experience

    1    None available
Remarks:
The unit comes with a factory calibration based on a
representative test dust.  An internal control allows
adjustment of response to match any reference gravi-
metric calibration.

The GCA MINIRAM offers the following data handling
capabilities:

    Readouts:  selectable; 10-second meacurerients; time-
               averaged measurements; shi:L-averaged
               measurements; elapsed samp'; ing "i  •>

    Storage:   7 average concentrations, sampling  times,
              off-times, and sampler identification number

    Memory playback:  either through instrument's own LCD
                      or by 300-baud ASCII (20 mA
                      loop or RS232 may be connected with
                      proper interface)
                                     115

-------
                       INHALABLE PARTICULATE MATTER
                         PORTABLE/ACTIVE/ANALYZER
                                         5-2
                                         GCA RAM-1
                                         Aerosol Monitor
                                         1 of 4
                                              Weight:   4 kg

                                              Dimensions:   20 x 20 x 20 cm
Principl e of
Operation:
Optical  Scattering.  As sample air, drawn b> pump,
passes through the sensing volume, a pulsed near-infrared
emitting diode in combination with a silicon detector
senses forward light scattering (centered at 70° +25°).
The upper limit of the particle size range is 20 urn;  a
series of prerollectors offer cutpoints of 1, 2, 4,  and
8 PH.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
Scattering coefficient of approximately 4 x 1Q-?
(mass equivalence is tied to reference dust)
Range:
0.001 to 200 mg/m3
0 to 200)
[selectable  0  to  2,  0  to  20,  or
Interferences:
None
                                     116

-------
                                                              5-2
                                                              GCA RAM-1
                                                              Aerusol Monitor
                                                              2 of 4
Multiparameter
Capability:
Participate (liquid or solid) matter readings only
Performance:
Sampling Rate:   2 1/nin  (adjustable 1 to 3 1/min),
                 conti nuous

Accuracy:  if calibrated for specific aerosol, equal to
           precis ion

Reproducibil ity :  +0.1% FS or_+0.005 mg/m^ (whichever is
                  Targer)

Linearity:  1% or better
                     Noise:   +0.001 mg/ni  at 32-secor1 time constant
                              +0.005 rcg/m^ at 2-second time con.v~  .t

                     Lagtime:  <0.5%

                     F.ise Time:  equal  to time constant (selectable time
                                 constants of 0.5, 2,  8,  and 32 seconds)

                     Retention Time:

                     Fall Time:  equal  to time constant (selectable time
                                 constants of 0.5, 2,  8,  and 3?. seconds)

                     Zero Drift:   +0.1% or +0.005 mg/m3

                     Span Drift   determined by measurement and zero precision
                                  stability over 24 hours (whichever is larger)
Operation:
Temperature Range:  0° to 50°C

Temperature Compensation:  electronic

Relative Humidity Range:   0% to 95/"
                                     117

-------
                                                              5-2
                                                              GCA RAM-1
                                                              Aerosol Monitor
                                                              3 of 4
                     Calibration:  reference scatterer or gravimetric reference
                                   cal ihrati on

                     Warm- Up Time:  <1 second

                     Unattended Period:   at least 6 hours on battery, unlimited
                                         on charger

                     Maintenance:  refillable diffusion-type drying cartridge
                                   for use in condensing atmospheres; high
                                   capacity filter cartridges externally
                                   accessible
Requirements:
Power:   Internal rechargeable 6-volt battery; charger
         operates from a.c. line
Features:
Output:  4-diqit LCD (updated 3 times each second);
         0- to 10-vrlt a.c. recorder output (minimum load
         impedance:  1,000 ohms)

Training,  none required for sampling

Options:  miniature strip chart recorder; intrinsic
          safety version available; averager/integrator
Costs:
RAM-1:  $5,950 (includes charger/a.c. line adaptor,  charger
        cable, cyclone preselector, inlet flow restrictor,
        two replacement filter cartridges, refill able
        desiccator, carrying s^ap, instrument/accessory
        case, manual)
Recorder:  51,170
Intrinsic safety version:   56,550
Averager/integrator:   51,490
Manufacturer:
GCA Corporation,  Technology Division,
  Environmental  Instruments
213 Burlington Road
Bedford,  Massachusetts  01730

(617) 275-5444
                                     118

-------
                                                              5-2
                                                              GCA RAM-1
                                                              Aerosol Monitor
                                                              4 of 4


References:           Specifications

                         1.  Manufacturer's bulletin, #2-80 CP/5M

                         2.  Tomb, T.F., H.N. Treaftis, and A.J.  Gero.   1981.
                             "Instantaneous Dust Exposure Monitors."  Environ.
                             Int. 5:85-96.

                     Operations experience

                         1.  Chansky, S.H., P. Lilienfeld, and K.  Wiltsee.   1979.
                             Evaluation of GCA Corporation's Model  RAM-S as
                             'an Equivalent Alternative to the Vertical  Elutriator
                             for Cotton Dust Measurement,  ilatural  Fibers
                             Textile Conference, Charlotte, North  Carolina.

                         2.  Konishi, Y. ,   An Evaluation of RAM-1  (GCA)
                             Working Environment Research Division  of Kitasato
                             Health Science Center, Japan.

                         3.  Rubow, K.L.,  and V.A.  Marple.  1981.   An Instrument
                             Evaluation Chamber.  C Liberation of  CommerciTI
                             Photometers,  Extended  Abstracts and  Final  Program.
                             International Symposium on Aerosols  in the Mining
                             ?nd Industrial Work Environment, November  1-6,  1979,
                             Minneapolis,  Minnesota.

                         4.  Taylor, C.D., and R.A. Jankowski.  1981.   The^Use  of
                             Instantaneous Samplers to Evaluate the Effectiveness
                             of Respirable Dust Contro1 "ReThods in  Underground
                             Mines.Fxiended Abstracts and Final  Program,
                             International Symposium on Aerosols  in the Mining
                             and Industrial Work Environment, November  1-6,  1981,
                             Minneapolis,  Minnesota.


Remarks:              The unit comes with a factory  calibration attuned  to a
                     representative respirable test dust.  A panel-mounted
                     control  allows precise adjustment of response  to
                     match  any reference gravimetric calibration.

                     The unit can be incorporated into a multipoint
                     sensing  approach with central  data acquisition.
                     Model  RAM-S is specifically designed for such
                     applications.


                                     119

-------
                       INHALABLE PARTICULATE MATTER
                       STATIONARY/ACTIVE/COLLECTOR
                                         SIERRA-ANDERSEN
                                         Dichotomous Sampler
                                         Series 241
                                         1 of 4
                                              Net
                                              Weight:   Control  Module,  25 kg
                                                       Samplino Module,  7 kg

                                              Total  Shipping  Weight:   39 kg

                                              Dimensions:
                                                Control  Module,  41  x  56  x 28 cm
                                                Sampling Module,  162  en  height,
                                                   76.2  cm  diameter tripod base
                                                   bolt  circle;  interconnecting
                                                   tubing,  10 m long
Princif1e of
Operation:
Size-selective inlet followed by virtual  impactor.   Ambient
air first is accelerated through a nozzle/target impactor
to remove particles larger than 10 ym aerodynamic diameter.
The sample air (containing particles <10 urn)) then  passes
through a virtual impactor that has a cut point of  2.5  m.
Fine (<2.5 urn) and coarse (>_2.5 urn) fractions are collected,
on separate 37-mm TEF-DISC™ Teflon filteis.   Mass con-
centration is quantitated gravimetrically.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
Range:
Any ambient particulate concentration
Interferences:
The Teflon filters have zero artifact formation.

                120

-------
                                                              5-3
                                                              SIERRA-ANDERSEN
                                                              Dichotomous Sampler
                                                              Series 241
                                                              2 of 4
Multiparameter
Capability:
Fine  (<2.5 urn) and coarse  (2.5-10 pm)  fractions and
inhalable particulate matter  (vine + coarse)
Performance:
Sampling Rate:  total sample flow:   16.7 1/rnin
                fine fraction:   15 1/min
                coarse fraction:  1.67 1/min

Accuracy:  constant flow controller:  +5% at 16.7 1/min
           over pressure drop range:  7J-35 cm Hg
           standard timer:  _+30 minutes per 7 days
           optional timer:  ~+2 minutes per week
           flow meters:  +3°'~at set  flows
                     Reproducibil ity:

                     Li nearity:

                     Noise:

                     Lagtime:

                     Ri se Ti me :

                     Retention Time:

                     Fall Time:

                     Zero Drift:

                     Span Drift:
Operation:
Temperature Range:  -20° to 40° C

Temperature Compensation:

Relative Humidity Range:  0% to 100%

Calibration:  only flow calibration required
                                     121

-------
                                                              5-3
                                                              SIERRA-ANDERSEN
                                                              Dichotomous  Sampler
                                                              Series 241
                                                              3 of 4
Features:
Procedure:

Warm-Up Time:

Unattended Period:  defined by sampling schedule

Maintenance:  routine

Power:  110/115 V a.c. +10::, 50 to 60 Hz, 6 amp max;
        230 V a.c. + 10^, 50 Hz, 4 amp max (optional)


Output:  elapsed timer:  0 tc 10,000 minutes in tenths
         f1ow event circular chart:  24 hours,
           10 cm diameter
         vacuum gages:  0 to 30 inches of Hg

Training:   recommended

Options:  digital  timer/programmer
Costs:
Series 241 dichotomous sampler:  $4,675
Digital timer/programmer:  $300
Model 246-10 field modi Ti cat ion;; kit (to retrofit
15 urn dichotomcus samplers):  $875
Manufacturer:
   Uest Coast
Sierra-Andersen
P.O.  Box 909
Carmel  Valley, California  93924

Toll-free:   '800) 538-9520
In Cali forn ia:
  (408)  659-3177
   East Coast
Si erra-Andersen
4215 Wendell  Drive
Atlanta, Georgia  30336

Toll-free:   (800) 241-6898
In Georgia:--
  (404) 691-1910
                                     122

-------
                                                                                              V.  i

                                                              5-3
                                                              SIERRA-ANDERSEN                •
                                                              Dichotomous Sampler              ,. ' ,
                                                              Series  241
                                                              4 of  4
References:           Specifications

                         1,   Manufacturer's  bulletin,  No.  SA-PM10-682

                     Openticns  experience

                         1.   None  available
Remarks:              The  size  selective  inlet  has  a  cut  point at  10 _+! um
                     over wind  2-2:4  KPH;  the virtual  impactor has a ~~
                     cut-point  at  2.5 um;  internal losses of the  virtual
                     impactor  are  less than  2% of  0  to 10 \
-------
                       INHALABLE PARTICULATE MATTER
                       STATIONARY/APT!VE/CQLL:CTOR
                                         5-4
                                         SIERRA-AtJDERSEN
                                         Medium Flo-.' Samplers
                                         Series 254
                                         1 of 4
                                           1  Net
                                              Weight:
                                  Control Module, 27 kg
                                  Sampling Module, 11 kg
                                              Total  Shipping l-'eight:   43  kg

                                              Dimensions:
                                                Control  Module,  41 x  50 x 28 cm;
                                                Sampling Module, 134  cm Height;
                                                Aerosol  Inlet,  1.3 m  height;
                                                six  1/4  in-20 mounting bolts on
                                                  91.4 and 101.6 cm diameter bolt
                                                  circles; interconnecting  tubing,
                                                  5  m long
Princ pie of
Operation •
Suspended particles in r.mbient air enter the 10 urn
Med-Flo™ inlet at a flow rate of 6.8 m3/hr-  The
particles are then accelerated through multiple impactor
nozzles.  By virtue of their larger momentum, particles
greater than the 10 urn cut point impact out and are
retained in the impaction chamber-  The particle fraction
smaller then 10 urn is carried vertically upward by the air
flow and down the vent tube to the 1-2 nm Sierra-Andersen
TCP-DISC™ Teflon filter where it is 'jniformly collected.
                                     124

-------
                                                              5-4
                                                              SIERRA-ANDERSEN
                                                              Medium  Flow Samplers
                                                              Series  254
                                                              2  ot  4
Lower Delertable
Range:


Range:


Interferences:
Any ambient participate concentration
Teflon filters have zero artifact formation
Multiparameter
Capability:
Performance:
In^alable participate matter <10 urn only


Sampling Rate:  6.8 n-Vhr

Accuracy:  Pneum3tic flow controller, +5% accuracy of
           6.8 m-Vhr over an inlet pressure droo of
           0 to 25 cm Hg; + 10X over an inlet pressure
           drop of 0 to 30~cm Hg

Repruducibility:  +2%

Linearity:

Noise:

Lagtime:

Rise Time:

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift:
                                   125

-------
                                                              5-4
                                                              SIERRA-AIiLERSEN
                                                              Medium Flow Samplers
                                                              Series 254
                                                              3 of 4
                                                                       'I
Operation:
Temperature Range:  -20° to 40° C, 600 to 300 mm Hg

Temperature Compensation:

Relative Humidity Range:  0% to 100%

Calibration:  only flew calibration required

Warm-Up Time:  N/A

Unattended Period:  defined by sampling schedule

Maintenance:  routine

Power:  254, 254M:  11Q/U5 V a.c., 50 to 60 Hz, 7 amp max;
        254X, 254MX:   220 V a.c., 50 Hz, 4 amp max
Features:
Costs:
Output:  flow event circular chart, 24 hours
         magnehelic gauge flow indicator

Training:  recommended

Options:  digital timer/programmer (optional), all
          functions digital  and quartz crystal controlled;
          has digital  deck  with l/2--;nch LED

Series 254 Medium Flov/ Sampler:  $3,475
Series 302 Digital  Timer/Programmer:   S300
Manufacturer:
   West Coast

Sierra-Andersen
P.O. Box 909
Camel  Valley, Ca'-'fornia  93924

Toll-free:   (800) 538-9520
In California:
  (408) 659-3177
   East Coa^t

S'erra-Andersen
4215 Wendel1  Drive
Atlanta, Georgia  30336

Toll-free:   (800)  241-6898
In Georgia:
  (404) 691-1910
                                     126

-------
                                                              5-4
                                                              SIERRA-ANDERSEN
                                                              Medium  Flow  Samplers
                                                              Series  254
                                                              4  of  4
References:           Specifications

                         1.   Manufacturer's  bulletin,  No.  SA-PM10-682

                     Operations  experience

                         1.   None  available
Remarks:              The size-selective inlet  has  a  cut  point  at  10 +1 urn
                     over wind speed  of 2  to 24  KPH;  it  neets  EPA's Expected
                          Ktderal  Reference Method.
                     If EPA promulgates a  10  urn particulate  matter
                     standard,  the  manufacturer guarantees to  obtain
                     EPA Reference  Method  approval  for  this  instrument.
                                     127

-------
                       INHALABLE PARTICULATE MATTER
                         PERSONAL/ACTIVE/COLLECTOR
                                         C-5
                                         SIERRA  INSTRUMENTS
                                         MARPLE  PERSONAL
                                         CASCADE  IMPACTOR
                                         1 of 4
                                              Model :        294   296   298

                                              Weight:       170   185   200  g

                                              Dimensions:   7.2   8.0   8.6  height

                                                           5.7   5.7   5.7  width

                                                           4.0   4.0   4.0  depth
Principl e of
Operati on:
Impaction.  Upon entering the inlet, sample air is acceler-
ated through radial slots in the first impaction stage.
Particles larger than the cut point impact on the perforated
collection substrate.  The sample air stream then passes to
the next inpactor stage, which exhibits a smaller cut point for
impaction, and so on through successively smaller cut points;
remaining fine particles are collected on a backup filter.
The model 294 has four stages, the model  296 has six stages,
and the model  298 has eight stages.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
                                     128

-------
Interferences:
Multiparameter
Capability:
                                                              5-5
                                                              SIERRA INSTRUMENTS
                                                              MARPLE PERSONAL
                                                              CASCADE IMPACTOR
                                                              2 of 4
Range:
Model 294 (4 stages)--cut points at 21, 15, 10, and
  3.5 urn
Model 286 (6 stages)--cut points at 10, 6, 3.5, 1.6, 0.9,
  and 0.5pm
Model 296 (8 stages)--cut points at 21, 15, 10, 6, 3.5,
  1.6, 0.9, and 0.5 urn
Performance:
Sampling Rate:  2 1/min

Accuracy:

Reprcducibility:

Li nearity:

Noise:

I agtime:

Ri se Tine:

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift:
                                     129

-------
Operati on:
Temperature Range:

Temperature Compensation:

Relative Humidity Range:

Calibration:

Procedure:

Warm-Up Time:

Unattended Period:

Maintenance:

Power:
                                                              5-5
                                                              SIERRA INSTRUMENTS
                                                              MARPLE PERSONAL
                                                              CASCADE IMPACTOR
                                                              3 of 4
Features:
Costs:
Manufacturer:
Output:

Trai ning:

Options:
Model 294:  $775
Model 296:  $975
Model 298:  $1,175
Sierra Instruments  Inc.
P.O. Box 909
Carmel Valley, California  93924

Toll free:   (800) 538-9520

In California:  (408)  G59-3177
                                     130

-------
                                                              5-5
                                                              SIERRA INSTRUMENTS
                                                              MARPLE PERSONAL
                                                              CASCADE IMPACTOR
                                                              4 of 4
References:   .        Specifications

                         1.   Manufacturer's bulletin

                     Operations experience

                         1.   None available
Renarks:              Available time did not permit review of this summary
                     by a manufacturer's representative.   Pricing information
                     was verified by telephone.
                                     131

-------
                       INHALABLE PARTICULATE MATTER
                         PORTABLE/ACTIVE/ANALYZER
                        STATIONARY/ACTIVE/ANALYZER
                                          5-6
                                          TSI  Piezo Balance
                                          Model 3500 and
                                          Model 5000
                                          1 of 5
                                 Weight:  4.5 kg (Modol  3500); 48 kg (Model  5000)

                                 Dimensions:  31 x 13 x 17 crn, Model 3500
                                              38 x 43 x 18 cm, sensor module   )Model
                                              38 x 43 x 18 cm, control  module  /5000
                                              38 x 43 x 42 cm, reservoir module/
Principle of
Operation:
Electrostatic precipitation/piezoelectric resonance.  The
sample air stream is passed through a cyclone or an impactor
to remove nonrespirable particles (aerodynamic diameter
>3.5 Mm).  RSP aerosol  exiting the impactcr is electrostati-
cally precipitated onto a quartz crystal  sensor.  The change
in oscillating frequency of the sensing crystal  during the
measurement period is proportional to collected  mass.  The
Model 3500 is battery-powered and portable with  manually
initiated sampling periods.  The Model  5000 is not battery-
powered, but has programmable automatic sampling cycles
for 24-hr/day monitoring.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
Approximately 5 ug/rn3 over a 10-minute averaging time
Range:
           Model 3500

Mass:       0.01 to 10 mg/m3
Size:       0.01 to 10 urn
           (502 cut off)
     Model  EOOO

0.0u5 to 9.999 mg/m3
0.01 to 10 urn
(50« cut off)
                                     132

-------
                                                              5-5
                                                              TSI Piezo Balance
                                                              Model  3500 and
                                                              Model  5000
                                                              2 of 5
Interferences:
Changes in relative humidity during a single measurement
period can cause error.  Dry, submic.'ometer, long-chain
agglomerated particles with no condensed water and no
other particles present (e.g., pure, dry diesel exhaust
particles) are not sensed accurately.
Multiparameter
Capability:
RSP mass only
Performance:
Collection Periods:  24 to ]20 seconds measurement
                     period (Model 3500); 10 seconds to
                     2 hours measurement period (Model  5000)

Collection Efficiency:  for respirable particles that
                        have passed through the respirable
                        cyclone or impactor, >95* of the
                        particles between 0.05 and 5 urn
                        deposit on the sensor

Sampling Rate:  1 1/m'n

Accuracy:  +10% +0.01 mg/m3

Reproducibility:  +5%

Linearity:  +IQ% for concentrations below 10 mg/m3

Noise:  +1 ug/m3 in most indoor environments

Laotime:  1 to 2 seconds

Rise Time:

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:   automatic rezero at the beginning of over/
             measurement

Span Drift:   crystal  sensitivity is an inherent property
             of the unbroken  piezoelectric quartz crystal;
             span does not drift

                133

-------
                                         5-6
                                         TSI Piezo Balance
                                         Model 3500 and
                                         Model 5000
                                         3 of 5
Operation:
Temperature Range: 5° to 40° C
Temperature Compensation:  none required if temperature
                           remains constant within +2° C
                           during a single measurement
                           period

Relative Humidity Range:  10% to 90%

CT! ib-ation:  internal reference for both collection
              efficiency and crystal sensitivity

Procedure:  portable, manual, panel  control  (Model 3500);
            programmable automatic control  (Model  5000)

Warm-Up Time:  in a normal room, 5 minutes or less (the
               instrument components in contact with ihe
               sample stream must be equilibrated  within
               +1° C of the sample stream temperature)

Unattended Period:  4 weeks (Model 5000)

Maintenance:  clean sensor crystal after 5 ug accumula-
              tion, as indicated by  display  (Mr* del 3500);
              check and refill  liquid levels at 1- to 4-week
              intervals, refill  paper tape (Model  5000);
              annual laboratory calibration  recommended

Power:  rechargable Ui-Cd, 8-hour operation  at 50% duty
        cycle, 15 hours recharge needed (Model 3500)
        single phase a.c. at 500 watts  total  (Model  5000)
Features:
Output:  4-digit LED (both);  40-column dotmatrix on roll
         paper (Model  5000(;  both analog  and digital  out-
         puts compatible with most data systems  (Model  5000)

Training:  none required for  sampling

Options:   variety of alternative upper size  cut  offs
          (impactors)  ranging from 0.5-10 urn or  respirable
          cyclone with 3.5 urn cutoff
Costs:
                     Model  3500:
                     Model  5UOO:
             34,990
             316,450
                134

-------
Manufacturer:
TSI, Incorporated
P.O. Box 43394
St. Paul , Minnesota  55164

(612) 483-0900
TELEX:   297-482
                                                              5-6
                                                              TSI Piezo Balance
                                                              Model 3500 and
                                                              Model 5000
                                                              4 of 5
References:
Specifications

    1.   Manufacturer's bulKlin, No. TSI 3500/5COO-10/80-10M.

    2.   Sem, G.,  K. Tsurubayashi ,  and K. Homma.  1977.
        Am. Ind.  Hyg. Assoc. J. 38:580-8.

    3.   Sem, G.,  and K. Tsurubayashi.  1975.  Am. Ind. Hyg.
        Assoc. J. 36:791-800.

    4.   Sen, G.,  and P. Daley.  1979.  Aerosol Measurement.
        D. Lundgren et al .,  ed.  University Presses of Florida,
        Gainesville, Florida, pp.  672-85.

    5.   Sem, G.,  and F. Quant.  1982.  J. Aerosol Sci. 13:227.

    6.   zen, G.,  and F. Quant.  1982.  Aerosols in the Mining
        and Industrial Work  Environment. Vol.  3, Instrumentation
        V. Parple and 8. Liu, e"cT   Ann Arbor Sciences, Ann
        Arbor, Michigan.


Operations experience

    1.   Repace, J., and A.  Lowrey.   1980.  Science, 208:464.

    2.   Linen., A.L.  19ul.   Evaluation of Ambient'Air
        Quality by Personal  Horn'toring~Vo'ltime  II
        Aerosols, Monitor  Pumps, Calibration,  aTTd
        Quality ControlT  (JRC Press, Inc.,  2000 Nw.
        24th Street, Boca  Raton, Florida.

    3.   Sen.,  G.  1977.  National Bureau of Standards,
        Special Publication  464, pp. 191-7.
                                     135

-------
                                     5-6
                                     TSI Piezo Bal artce
                                     Model 3r'00 and
                                     Model 5000
                                     5 of 5
4.  Fair-child, C., M. Tillery, and M. Ettinger.  1980.
    "An Evaluation cf Fast Response Aerosol Mass
    Monitors." Report LA-S220.  Los Alamos Scientific
    Laboratory, P.O. Box i663, Los Alamos, Uew Mexico.

5.  Repace, J., and A. Lowery.  1982.  Aiierico'i Society
    of Heating, Refrigerating and A i r - Condi ticming
    Engineers Transactions.Vol. 88, part 1~

6.  Quant, F., P. Nelson, =ind G. Sen.  1982.  "Experi-
    ental  Measurements of Aerosol Concentrations in
    Offices." Environ. Int. 8:223-7.

7.  Hersh, S., R. Fornes, and M. Anand.  1978.
    Proceedings, 1978 Beltwide Cotton Production-
    Mechanization Conference and Special Sessions.
    pp. 129-35.National Cotton Council of America,
    Memphis, Tennessee.

8.  Hersh, S., R. Fornes, and 11. Anand.  1979.  '.-,.
    Ind. Hyg. Assoc. J. 40:578 -87.
            136

-------
                             NITROGEN DIOXIDE
                         PORTABLE/ACT1VE/ANALYZER
                                         6-1
                                         CSI  2200
                                         Portable  NOX
                                         Analyzer
                                         1 of  4
                                              Weight:   8.7  kg

                                              Dimensions:   20  x  1  x 46 cm
Principle  of
Operation:
Chemiluminescence.  Sample air is initially routed to a
reaction chamuer where chemil uminescent. reaction with
ozone is detected and quantified by a photomultip!ier
tube, producing the NO signal, which is stored electroni-
cally.  A second air sample is routed through an NOg-to-
NO converter and then to the ozone reaction chamber.
                     producing  the  NOX  signal.   The  N02  value
                     cally  ralculated'by  subtracting NO  from I
                                         is electroni-
Lower  Detectable
Limit:
0.020 ppm (5-second time constant setting)
0.010 ppm (60-second time constant setting)
Range:


Interferences:
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, or 5.0 ppm
Total  interference equivalent for HjO, S02,  NO,  and NIH3
is 0.10 pom on the NOX channel.
                                    137

-------
                                                              6-1
                                                              CSI 2200
                                                              Portable NOX
                                                              Analyzer
                                                              2 of 4
Mul ti
Capability:
NOX, K'O, N02
Performance:
Sampling Rate:  700 ml/min, continuous

Accuracy:  depends on calibration source accuracy

Reproducibility:  2% of full scale

Linearity:  1% for NO, N'0X; 1.5% for N02

Noise:  0.10 ppm at 5-secorvi time constant, 0.005 ppm at
        60-second time constant

Lag Time:  5 seconds at 5-second time constant and
           at 60-second time constant

Rise Time:  22 seconds at 5-second time constant;
            3 minutes at 60-socond time constant

Retention Time:

Fall Time:  20 seconds at 5-second time constant;
            3 minutes at 60-second time constant

Zero Drift:  +0.005 ppm +0.0005 ppm/° C at 15° to 35° C
             Tor 12 hours

Span Drift:  +2% +0,3%/° C at 15 to 35° C for 12 hours
Operation:
Temperature Range: 10° to 40°C

Temperature Compensation:  reactor and photomultiplier
                           tube temperature controlled
                                    138

-------
                                                              e-1
                                                              CSI  2200
                                                              Portable
                                                              Analyzer
                                                              3  of 4
                     Relative  Humidity  Range:   5%  to  95%

                     Calibration:   gas  phase  titration

                     Warm-Up Time:   30  minutes

                     Unattended  Period:   2 hours on internal  battery,  5  hours
                                         with external  battery  pack, 7 or more
                                         dcys with a.c. adapter/charger

                     Maintenance:   converter  life  is  normally 1 year;
                                   operating manual describes routine maintenance

                     Power:  12  V  d.c.
Features:
Output:  0 to 1 V d.c. for NO, NOX, fJOg; 12 V d.c. for
         optional battery-operated chart recorder, 10 V d.c.,
         1 mA-fault output, 10 V d.c., 1 mA-alarm output
         plus analog panel meter

Training:  recommended

Options:  portable recorder, 1-inch/hr chart speed
          12-volt auto lighter cable assembly; auxiliary
          battery pack (provides up to 8 hours of additional
          battery operation)
Costs:
Model 2200:  $7,350

Recorder:  $725

12-volt auto lighter cable:   $98

Auxiliary battery pack:  $575
                                     139

-------
                                                              6-1
                                                              CSI 2200
                                                              Portable NOX
                                                              Analyzer
                                                              4 of 4
                                                                                            -3
Manufacturer:
Columbia Scientific Industries Corpor.
P.O. Box 9908
Austin, Texas  78766

Toll-free:  800-531-5003
In Texas (512) 258-5191

TWX:  910-374-1364
                                                                                             -ii
                                                                                             ^
                                                                                             \
References:
Specifications

    1.  Mannfacturer'5 bulletin

Operations experience

    i.  None available
Remarks:
Unit offers automatic failure diagnosis and display
system,

Photomultiplier tube temperature is maintained at
20° C by a thermoelectric cooling system to minimize
noise and zero drift.

Gas reaction chamber is regulated at 42° C to minimize
span errors.

CSI offers training sessions in Austin, Texas, on a
monthly basis.
                                     140

-------
                             NITROGEN DIOXIDE
                        PERSONAL/PASSIVE/COLLECTOR
                                         6-2
                                         DU PONT
                                         PRO-TEKR
                                         N02 Passive Dosimeter
                                         Type C30
                                         ] of 3
                                              Weight:   16 g

                                              Dimensions:  7.6 x 7.1 x 0.89 cm
Principl e of
Operation:
Diffusion/sorption.  Collection Belies upon molecular
diffusion to deliver sample air to a liquid sorbent
solution at a constant rate.  After exposure, the
sorbent is analyzed in a laboratory spertrophotonieter or
Pro-TekR DT-3 Readout for K'Oj content and subsequently
the tine-weighted average concentration.  Laboratory validation
has been conducted only for up to b-hcur exporures, although it
is very likely that lonyer exposure times are possible.
Lower Detectable
Limit:

Range:
10 ppm-hr, when analvzed in a PT-3 Readout; 1.5 ppm-hr,
when analyzed in a laooratory spectrophotorieter

10 to 100 ppm-hr (PT-3 Readout)
1.5 to 200 ppm-hr (laboratory spectrophotometer)
Interferences:
The major known interferences are SOj, nitrates, ozone,
and strong oxidizing agents.  These interferences wi1"  not
affect the Pro-Tek^ Sulfur Dioxide Colorinetric Cadge for
N'Og because they have little or no affinity tor the absorb-
ing solution.

-------
Multiparameter
Capability:
Performance:
Operation:
Features:
                                                              6-2
                                                              DU PONT
                                                              PRO-TEKR
                                                              M0£ Passive Dosimeter
                                                              Type C30
                                                              2 of 3
UO2 only


Sampling Rate:  diffusion, continuous

Accuracy:  +18.2%  (overall system accuracy)

Precision:   7.5%

Sensitivity:   1.5  ppm-hr

Response Time:  1.3 seconds (calculated)


Temperature  Range:  4° to 49° C

Temperature  Compensation:

Relative Humidity  Range:

Calibration:   laboratory standards

Warm-Up Time:

Unattended Period:  8 hours

Maintenance:   none

Power:  none required for sampling


Output:

Training:  none required for sampling

Options:
                                    142

-------
                                                              6-2
                                                              DU PONT
                                                              PRO~TEKR
                                                              N02 Passive Dosimeter
                                                              Type C30
                                                              3 of 3
Costs:               Type C30, 10 per box:
                         1-10 boxes:  § $259 (Order Code 5115)
                        11-25 boxes:  0 $233 (Order Code 511M
                          26+ boxes:  0 $207 (Order Code 5117)
Manufacturer:         E.I.  du Pont de Nemours & Co.  (Inc.)
                     Finishes and Fabricated Products Department
                     Applied Technology Division
                     BRML-9
                     Wilmington, Delaware  19898

                     (302) 772-5989
References:           Specifications

                         1.   Manufacturer's analysis  instructions.

                         2.   K'-ing, E.V.,  et al.   1981.   "A  New  Passive
                             Colorimetric  Air Monitoring  Bodge System  for
                             Ammonia.,  Sulfur Dioxide,  and Nitrogen  Dioxide."
                             Am.  Ind.  Hyg.  Assoc.  J.  42:373-81.

                     Operations experience

                         1.   Woebkenberg,  M.L.   1982.   "A Comparison of  Three
                             Passive Personal  Sampling Methods for  N02-"
                             Am.  Ind.  Hyg.  Assoc.  J.  43:553-61.

                         2.   Laboratory Validation Report, Pro-Tek^ Nitrogen
                             Dioxide Badge, Type C30,  Du  Pont (2/2/81).


Remarks:              Immediate  readout is  possible using  PT-3 Colorimeter
                     because chemical  reagents  are stored inside  the
                     badge.   However,  greater sensitivity is possible
                     from a  laboratory spectrophotometer.

                     Shelf life for the N02 Passive Dosimeter is
                     defined as follows:

                         Unexposed  - 6 months  refrigerated (40°  to  45° F)
                         Exposed    3 weeks  refrigerateu  (40° to  45° F)
                                   2 weeks  unrefigeruted  (up to  78° F)

                                    143

-------
                             NITROGEN DIOXIDE
                        PERSONAL/PASSIVE/COLLECTOR
                                         6-3
                                         MDA
                                         Palmes Tube
                                         1 of 3
Principle of
Operation:
                                              Weight:   14 g

                                              Dimensions:  8.9 cm length
                                                           1.3 cm diameter
Diffusion/sorption.  The sampler consists of a hollow tube
with a permanently sealed base containing triethanolamine
(TEA), an efficient collector for IJ02-  The opposite
end is fitted with a removable cap.  During sampling,
the cap is removed, and M02 diffuses to the collector
at a rate determined primarily by the tube geometry and
ambient fJOj concentration.  At the end of sampling,
the cap is replaced.  The TEA substrate is subse-
quently analyzed in the laboratory to quantitate the
time weighted average concentration.  Exposure periods
in indoor air quality settings are ordinarily for 1 week
or longer, while exposure periods in industrial  hygiene
applications are typically 8 hours.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
1 ppm-hr
Kange:
1 ppm-hr to 20 ppm-hr (ultimate sorbant capacity exceeds
1,000 ppm-hr)
Interferences:
Mone
                                    144

-------
                                                              6-3
                                                              MDA
                                                              Palmes Tube
                                                              2 of 3
Multiparameter
Capability:
May be user-converted to collect NOX (see remark #2]
Performance:
Sampling Rate:  .approximately 1 nl/min at 1 ppm N02,
                continuous

Accuracy:  +_2Q% at TLV

Reproducibil ity :
Operation:
Ambient Temperature Range:  essentially unrestricted

Temperature Compensation:   none required

Relative Humidity Range:  10% to 95%

Calibration:  standard curve for laboratory analysis
              constructed by user from known standards

Unattended Period:  5 hours to 1 week

Power:  none required for sampling
Features:
Costs:
Output:  laboratory report

Training:  none required for sampling

Options:


S8.00 to S10.00 per tube (includes all  necessary components
except chemical reagents); detailed instruction manual
accompanies package of 10 tubes describing all reagent
preparation and analytical procedures

-------
                                                              6-3
                                                              MDA
                                                              Fairies Tube
                                                              3 of 3
Manufacturer:
References:
MDA Scientific,  Inc.
1815 Elmdale Avenue
Glenview,  Illinois  60025

(312) 998-1600

TELEX:  72-6399  MDA-GLVU


Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

    2.  McMahon, R., Chemist, MDA Scientific, Inc.
        Personal communication, 1982.

    3.  Palmes,  E.D. 1979.   "Personal Sampler for
        Measurement of Anbient Levels of NOg."
        Proceedings of the Symposium on the Development
        and Usage of Personal Monitors for Exposure
        and Health Effects Studies.  U.S. Environmental
        Protection Agency Report !!o. EPA-600/9-79-032.

    4.  Palmes,  E.G., and C. Tomczyk. 1979.  "Personal
        Sampler  for NOX."  Am. Ind. Hyg.  Assoc.  J. 40:588-59,

Operations experience

    1.  Palmes,  E.D. 1981. " Development ai.d Applica-
        tion of  a Diffusional Sampler for NO^."
        Environ. Int. 6:97-100.
Remarks:
Sampling range can be greatly extended by
carefully diluting the desorbed sample.

The sampler can be converted to collect NOX
(NO + M02) by inserting a user-supplied oxidizing
screen (see Palmes and Tomczyk 1979).

The sampler tubes are reusable.
                                    146

-------
                             NITROGEN DIOXIDE
                         PORTABLE/ACTIVE/ANALYZER
                                         6-4
                                         TGM  555
                                         N02  ANALYZER
                                         1 of 3

                                              Weight:  14 kg

                                              Dimensions:  51 x 41 x 18 cm
Principl e of
Operation:
Automated wet chemistry/colorimetry.  Sample air is con-
tinuously absorbed in an azo dye forming reagent.  The
intensity of the azo dye formed is measured at 550 nm and
is directly proportional to the concentration of N02-
Reagent bundling and processing is automatic.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
0.005 ppm for 0 to 0.15 ppm full scale
Range:


Interferences:
0 to 0.15 ppm (adjustable to 10 ppm)
Uegligible
I^ul ti parameter
Capabi1ity:
                                    147

-------
                                                              6-4
                                                              TGM 555
                                                              N02 ANALYZER
                                                              2 of 3
Performance:
Operation:
Sampling Rate:   250 ml/min, continuous

Accuracy:

Reproducibility:   1%

Linearity:  <2%  (up to 0 to 5 ppm range)

Noise:

Lagtime:  2 minutes

Rise Time:  3 minutes (to 90%)

Retention Time:

Fall Time:  3 minutes (to 90«)

Zero Drift:  <2% (72 hours)

Span Drift:  <2% (72 hours)


Temperature Range:  "5° to 25° C

Temperature Compensation:

Relative Humidity Range:  5% to 95%

Calibration:  with liquid standards,  permeation tubes,  or
              gas-phase titration

Warm-Up Time:   20 minutes

Unattended Period:  18 hours on fully charged batteries

Maintenance:
                                     148

-------
                                                              6-4
                                                              TGM 555
                                                              N02 ANALYZER
                                                              3 of 3
                     Power:   12 V d.c. unregulated, 4 watts 115/230 V a.c.,
                             50/60 Hz
Features:
Output:  digital panel meter
         0 to 1 V at 0 to 2.0 mi 11 lamps recorder output

Training:  none required for sampling

Options:  Reaction Chamber (for counting NO to t^}
          Stream Splitter (to extend range by a factor
          of 10 or 100)
Costs:
TGM 555:  $5,340

Reactor Chamber:  $150

Stream Splitter:  $295
Manufacturer:
CEA Instruments, Inc.
15 Charles Street
Uestwood, New Jersey  07675

(201)  664-2300
TELEX:  64H28
References:
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

Operations experience

    1.  None available
Remarks:
The unit can be fitted for monitoring IJOX by
installing a solid oxidant converter, which converts
tJO to N02-
                                     149

-------
                             I-JITROGEN DIOXIDE
                        PERSONAL/PASS1VE/COLLKCTOR
                                         6-5
                                         TOYO ROSHI
                                         MOg Badge
                                         1 of 3







1








s 	 38 • 	 >
5n
u








tf c
cs ^
I
\



I
) V
1-
[_
-^—



3
'T-T
5

. 2
/
1



   1 Badge case  2 /absorbent sheet
   3 Diffision controlling mat  4 Clasp
                         Weight:  15 g

                         Dv  >nsions:  5 x 4 x 1 cm
Principle  of
Operation:
Diffusion/adsorption.  A filter treated with tn'pthanol-
anine (TEA) adsorbs IJOj that diffuses through a series
of hydrophobia fiber filters that suppress wind effects.
Sorbed NOg is quantitated spectrophotometrically.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
66 ppb-hr
Range:
Up to 1C)6 ppb-hr, theoretical
Interferences:
Adsorption rate for UOy may vary by as much as 20% under
wind velocities between 0.15 and 4.0 m/sec.  The effect of
relative humidity (between 40* and 80% RH) is less than
that of wind velocity.  Maximum adsorption rate occurs at
60% RH.
                                     150

-------
Multi parameter
C? ability:
Performance:
Operati on:
Features:
Costs:
                                                              TOYO ROSHI
                                                              N02 Badge
                                                              2 of 3
N02 only; may be converted to NOX only (cee remark #2)


Sampling Rate:  1 ml/sec nominal, continuous

Accuracy:  +20%

Reproducibility:  <4.8%

Linearity:  
-------
                                                              TOYO ROSHI
                                                              N02 Badge
                                                              3 of 3
Manufacturer:        Micro Filtration Systems
                     6000 Sierra Court
                     Dublin, California  94566

                     (415) 828-6010
References:          Specifications
                         1.  Yanagicawa, v., and H. Nishimura.  1980.  "A Badge
                             Type Personal  Sampler for NO2 to be Used in the
                             Living Environment."  Presented at the Fifth Clean
                             Air Congress,  Buenos Aires, Argentina, October 1980.

                         2.  Yanogisawa, Y., and H. Uishinura.  1981.  "Badge-Type
                             Personal  Sampler fcr Measuremont of Personal Expo-
                             sure to K!02 and NO in Ambient Air."  Presented
                             at the International Symposium on Indoor Air
                             Pollution, Health and Energy Conservation,  Amherst,
                             Massachusetts, October 1981.
                     Operations experience

                         1.  Both references above summarize specifications as
                             well as field use.
Remarks:              The ba'ige can be-converted for collecting NOX
                     (HO + rlOg) by treating intervening filters
                     with a 5% chromium trioxide solution to oxidize
                     rJO to N02 as it diffuses to the sorbant filter-
                     N02 diffuses through unaltered and is adsorbed.

                     Laboratory analysis is spectrophotonietric anu uses
                     easily obtained reagents.
                                     152

-------
                                   OZOtJE
                         PORTABLE/ACTIVE/ANALYZER
                                                               7-1
                                                               CSI  2000
                                                               PORTABLE  OZONE METER
                                                               1  of 3
                                              Weight:   1,1 kg  (9.9 kg with
                                                        optional battery  pack)

                                              Dimensions:  20.3 x 17.8 x 45.7 cm
Principl e of
Operation:
                     Cheniluminescence.  Photometric detection of the flame!ess
                     reaction of ethylene gas with ozone.
Lower Detectable     0.004 ppm (on 5-second filter setting)
Limit:               0.001 ppm (on 60-second filter setting)
Range:


Interferences:
                     0 to 0.10, 0 to 0.20, 0 to 0.50, and 0 to 1.00 ppm
                     <+9.995 ppm total for ^0, CO, and
Multiparameter
Capability:
                     Ozone only
                                     153

-------
                                                              7-1
                                                              CSI 2000
                                                              PORTABLE OZONE METER
                                                              2 of 3
Performance:
Operation:
Sampling Rate:  700 ml/min, continuous

Accuracy:

Reproducebilivy:  +1.0" of full scale

Linearity:  1% of ful 1 scale

Noise:  0.002 pptn on 5-second  filter setting, -.0.005 ppm
        on 60-secor,d filter setting           ~

Lagtime:  3 minutes

Rise Time:  15 seconds on 5-second filter setting
            180 seconds on 60-second filter setting

Retention Tine:

Fall Time:  Same as rise time

Zoro Drift:  +0.002 ppm +0.0002 ppm/°C for 12 hours at
             TO0 to 35° T

Span Drift:  +1% +2%/°C for 12 hours at 10° to 35° C


Temperature Range:  10° to 40° C

Temperature Compensation:   none required, 10° to 40° C

Relative Humidity Range:   5% to 95%

Calibration:  gas phase titration
                                                                                            4
                                     154

-------
Features:
Costs:


Manufacturer-
References:
Remarks:
                                                              7-1
                                                              CSI 2000
                                                              PORTABLE 070UE METER
                                                              3 of 3
Warm-Up Time:  30 minutes

Unattended Period:  8 hours for battery operation

Maintenance:

Power:  14 V d.c. (also 120 or 230 V a.c. with charger/adapter)


Output:  panel meter, 0 to 1.0 or 0.100 mV recorder output

Training:  recommended

Options:  battery pack
          battery charger


Model 2000:   $6,750 ('Includes battery and charger)


Columbia Scientific Industries Corp.
P.O. Box 9908
Austin, Texas

Toll free:   (800) 531-5003

In Texas:  (512) 258-5191


Spec ifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

Operations  experience

    1.  None available
The Model  2000 is an EPA-Designated Reference Method
for Ozone.

Not reviewed by manufacturer's representative.  Pricing
information has been verified by telephone.
                                     155

-------
                                    RADON
                        STATIONARY/PASSIVE/COLLECTOR
                                          AEROVIRONMENT (AV)
                                          PRM LR-5
                                          1 of 4
               / '  '. ^^-f-T"V>TC««-^-w^(*?,pv ..^v.
               »'  -' '' -',-'- '•''. ^''''.-VC^SfJ,-1--^- '•-"

               "'^':^-^:®l5-
Principle of
Operation:
                                              Weight:   9  kg

                                              Dinensions:   51  mm  high  x 23 cm diameter
Electrostatic collection/thermoluminescent  dosimetry.
Ambient radon diffuses into a sensitive chamber  where
subsequent disintegration of ions are electrostatically
focused onto a thermaluminescent dosimeter  (TLD)  chip
held at negative potential in a 900 to 1200-volt  electrostatic
field.  Each alpha particle striking the chip  creates
metastable defects in the crystal, which can be  read and
related to integrated radon concentration.  A  water-
impermeable membrane keeps the chamber dry  while  allowing
radon to diffuse in through the bottom.  With  the membrane,
a oesiccant material is not needed, greatly extending  the
possible sampling tines in humid climates,  and eliminating
deciccant drying.  A second TLD chip is exposed  away from
the electrostatic field (at the base of the housing)
to check background levels of gamma radiation.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
Ranges fron 0.03 pCi/1/week under laboratory conditions
within a limited rar.ge of raaon concentration  to 0.2  pCi/1
under adverse field conditions.  (CaF2:Dy TLD)
Range:


Interferences:
0.03 pCi/1 to 104 pCi/1
                                     156

-------
Multiparameter
Capability:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              8-1
                                                              AEROVIRONMENT (AVl
                                                              PRM
                                                              LR-5
                                                              2 of 4
Radon only


Sampling Rate:  diffusion, continuous

Accuracy:

Reproducibility:

Li nearity:

No\se:

Response time:  8 hours with mylar membrane

Lagtime:

Rise Time:

Retention Time:

Fall  Time:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift:

Detector Response (CaF2:Dy)--alpha 0.6 _+0.1 counts per
                               pCi hr/lT
                           --gamma 16.5 counts per mR/hr


Ambient Temperature Range: -45° to 65° C

Temperature Compensation:   none

Relative Humidity Range:   0% to 100% for extended periods

Calibration:  laboratory calibration available
                                     157

-------
                                                              8-1
                                                              AEROVIROIJMENT (AV;
                                                              PRM
                                                              LR-5
                                                              3 of 4
Features:
Warn-Up Time:  none

Unattended Period:  <1 week to 12 months

Maintenance:  check battery voltage

Power:  4 Everready Mini-max No. 493 batteries


Output:  counts from TLD reade.-

Training:  none required for sampling

Options and Accessories:  spare TLD holders
                          replacement batteries
Costs:
Manufacturer:
LR-5:  $595 each (complete with batteries, good for
       1 year); 2 TLD chip holders (more available
       on request); quantity discount available

AeroVironment, Inc.
5680 South Syracuse Circle #300
Englewood, Colorado  80111

(303) 771-3586

Head Office:

145 Vista Avenue
Pasadena, California  91107
References:
Specifications

    1.   Manufacturer's bulletin

    2.   George,  A.C.   1977.   "A Passive Environmental  Radon
        Monitor."   In Radon  Workshop.   A.J.  Breslin,  ed.
        U.S.  Energy Research dnd Development Administra-
        tion,  Report  HASL-325,  Health  and Safety Laboratory,
        New York,  New York,  pp. 25-30.
                                     158

-------
                                                              8-1
                                                              AEROVIROIJMENT (AV)
                                                              PRM
                                                              LR-5
                                                              4 of 4
                         3.   Friedland, S.S., L. Rathbun, and A.M. Goldstein.
                             1980.   "Radon Monitoring:  Uranium Mill  Field
                             Experience with a Passive Detector."
                     Operations experience

                         1.   None available
Remarks:              This instrument is based on the Passive Environmental
                     Radon Monitor (PERM) developed at the DOE Envi ronir?nta'1
                     Measurements Laboratory (George 1977) and modified bv
                     AeroVironment (Freidland, Rathbun,  and Goldstein 1930).

                     Recommended monitoring time for this instrument is
                     1 week  to 1 month.  However, nondesiccant membrane
                     and spare battery voltage give exposure periods limited
                     only by battery life, whic'  should  extend for at least
                     1 year.
                                     159

-------
                                    RADON
                         STATIONARY/ACTIVE/COLLECTOR
                                         8-2
                                         EBERLIIJE
                                         WORKING LEVEL MONITOR
                                         1 of 3
                                         Weight:
                             2.6 kg, ULM-1
                             6.8 kg, WLR-1
Dimensions:
                                 14.6 x 11.7
                                 35.6 \ 4C.7
                                                                  x 20 cm,  WLM-1
                                                                  x 15.2 cm,  WLR-1
Principle of
Operation:
Filtration with integrated gross alpha counting.  Radon
progeny are collected on a filter and con.vquent alpha
activity is measured using a silicon-diffused jinction
detector.  A microprocessor counts and stores detected
alpha pulses.  The microprocessor also controls the
sampling pump and records decay (tail) measurements
after the sampling interval  is terminated.  Length of
sample interval and detail  of tail data are operator-
selectable by key-pad entries on readout unit.  Data are
retrieved through a separate readout unit that also
calculates working levels with percent thoron daughters.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
2 x 10~5 [n (99% confidence level based on background of
0.1 counts per minute and 168 hours sample tine)
Range:
Capable of measuring naturally occurring background
levels with an upper limit as indicated below:

    Based on 200 1-minute intervals, 1.5 x 1C3  WL
    Based on 168 1-hour intervals, 1 x 102 ML
Interferences:
Cosmic radiation, long-lived alpha emitters such as
uranium and thorium
                                     160

-------
Multiparameter
Capability:
                                                              8-2
                                                              EBERLIX'E
                                                              WORKING LEVEL MONITOR
                                                              2 of 3
Working level plus percent thoron daughters; detail of
tail data
Performance:
Operation:
Sampling Rate:  0.12 to 0.18 1/min, continuous; intervals
                are selectable

Accuracy:  <5% maximum error under cases of extreme
           disequilibrium, plus any error induced by
           calibration.  Typical accuracy is +5%

Reproducibility:  unknown, but expected tc be very good

Linearity:  +0.5%

Noise:  none

Lagtime:

Rise Time:

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:  none

Span Drift:  none


Ambient Temoerature Range:  30° to 120° F

Temperature Compensation:   none

Relative Humidity Range:   0% to 90« noncondensing

Calibration:   americium or thorium alpha source alonn with
              flow rate calibration

Warm-Up Time:   <1  nrin.

UnattendeJ Period:  168-hour data run plus 4-hour tail
                    acquisition with extended sto.'idby
                                     161

-------
                                                              8-2
                                                              EBERLINE
                                                              WORKING LEVEL MONITOR
                                                              3 of 3
Features:
Costs:


Manufacturer:
Maintenance:   Exchange  sample  filter;  recharge battery

Power:   6-volt gel cell  for  sampler  (6 amp-hour);
         a.c. power for  readout

Output:   (Readout unit)  electrosensitive printer,
          21 characters  per line, 2 lines/sec, operator
          interactive alpha/numeric LCD display

Training:  none required  for sampling

Options:   battery charging stations


Approx.  52,000 each, WLM-1;  53,000 each, WLR-1
Eberline  Instrument Corporation
P.O. Box  2108
Santa Fe, New Mexico  87501

(505) 471-3232
TWX:  (910) 985-0678
References:
Specifications

    1.  Beard, R., et al.  1981.  "Eberline's New Micro-
        computer Based Radon Daughter Instrument."
        Presented at the International  Symposium on Indoor
        Air Pollution, Health and Energy Conservation,
        Amherst, Massachusetts, October 1981.

    2.  Geiger, E-L.  Eberline Instrument Corporation,
        personal communication, 1982.

Operation experience

    1.  Prototypes have been tested at U.S. Bureau of
        Mines, Denver, CO.   Further testing is planned and
        in progress.
Remarks:
The readout unit (Model  WLR-1) is required to service the
monitor (Model WLM-1).  One readout unit can service many
WLM-1s.
                                     162

-------
                            RADON/RADON PROGENY
                         PORTABLE/ACTIVE/ANALYZER
                                         8-3
                                         EDA
                                         RDA-200
                                         Radon/Radon Daughter
                                         Detector
                                         1 of 4
                               Weight:   console,  1.7 kg;  system,  8.C kg

                               Dimensions:   console, 12.7 x 16.5  x  20 cm
                                            total  system  packaged,  61 x 61  x  35.5  cm
                                            gas cell,  160 ml,  5.3 cm diameter x 7.3 cm
Principle of
Operation:
scintillation coupled to a high gain photonultip!ier and
sealer.  A known volume of sample air is drawn through a
sampling train composed of a filter at the inlet followed by
a gas scintillation cell and a user-supplied pump.   Radon
daughter products collect in the filter; the gas cell  retains
a sample of radon in air-  The filter is placed in  a scintil-
lation tray for counting in the detector; the gas  cell  is
placed directly into the detector for counting.  Details of
sampling (flow rate, duration) and subsequent alpha counting
(time factors) are determined by the operator and  tne  technique
employed.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
Dictated by background and technique

Uorking Level:   0.03 Kusnetz
                0.01 Tsivolglou
                0.01 Rolle

Radon:   subpicocurie/1iter
                                     163

-------
£ange:
Interferences:
Multiparameter
Capability:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              8-3
                                                              EDA
                                                              RDA-200
                                                              Radon/Radon Daughter
                                                              Detector
                                                              2 of 4
0-99,999 counts (up to 15,000 cpm without loss of
sensitivity); counting periods of 1, 2, 5, 10, and
60 minutes selectable plus manual
Working level, radon-222, thoron, radium-226

Collection Efficiency:


Sampling Rate:  specified by user and technique

Accuracy:

Reproducibility:

Li nearity:

Noise:

Lagtime:

Rise Time:

Retention  Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift


Temperature Range:  -30° to 40° C

Temperature Compensation:

Relative Humidity Range:
                                     164

-------
                                                              8-3
                                                              EDA
                                                              RDA -200
                                                              Radon/Radon Daughter
                                                              Detector
                                                              3 of 4
Features:
Calibration:  radon-222 standard gas source ana
              amer icium-241 disc

Warm-Up Time:

Unattended Period:

Maintenance:

Power:  8 C cells  standard; external battery
        pack or a.c. line source optional


Output:  5-digit LED

Training:  recommended

Options:  RDU-200—degassing systen for determinations
          from water and sediments
          -RDX-207--americium-241 calibration disc
          RDX-261--battery charger
          RDX-263--external a.c./d.c.  converter
          RDX-251—end of counting audio alarm
(Various air pumps, flow meters, a,id specialized detector
eel Is also available)
Costs:
RDA-200:  $4,450 (includes detector console, radium test
cell, 5 double swagelock radon gas cells,  5 scintillator
trays, 2 filter holders, 100 0.8  m filters, 8 C cell
batteries and manual)
                     RDU-200:
                     RDX-207:
                     RDX-261:
                     RDX-2G3:
                     RDX-251:
          $1,950
          $650
          $250
          $185
          $75
Manufacturer:
EDA Instruments, inc.
5151 Ward Road
Wheat Ridge, Colorado  80033

(303) 122-9122
TELEX:   450681
                                     165

-------
Head Office:
1 Thorncliffe Park Drive
Toronto, Canada M4H1G9
(416) 425-7800

TELEX:   06 23222 EDA TOR
Cables:  INSTRUMENTS TORONTO
                                         8-3
                                         EDA
                                         RDA-200
                                         Radon/Radon Daughter
                                         Detector
                                         4 of 4
References:
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin, RDA-200 0189

Operations experience

    1.  Moschandreas, D.O,. and H.':. Rector.  1981.
        "Indoor Radon Concentrations."  Inter-
        national  Symposium on Inooor Pollution,
        Health, and Energy Conservation, Amherst,
        Massachusetts .
Remarks:
Manufacturer states that >1,000 instruments of this
type are currently in use over 40 countries
(manufacturer's bulletin).

Scintillator efficiency is in excess of 35% or 3.3 cpm/pci
for the RDA-200.
                166

-------
                                   RADON
                        STATIONARY/ACTIVE/ANALYZER
                                          8-4
                                          EDA  RGA-400
                                          Radon  Gas  Monitor
                                          1  of 4
                                              Weight:

                                              Dimensions:
Principl e of
Operation:
Filtration/alpha spectroscopy ai,d electrostatic precipita-
tion with apex focusing collectirn/alpha spectroscopy.
Anbient air is drawn through a profilter, which collects
daughter products of radon-222 and radon-220.  Particle-
free air enters a coaxially oriented 3000 ml samp;2 chamber
where decay ions ere drawn by a strong electrostatic field
to be deposited on a solid state detector.  Subsequent
alpha decay is spectrally analyzed to discriminate between
the two radon isotopes.  Daughter products captured on
the prefilter are analyzed in a colinear detection system to
discriminate all  alpha-emitting daughters.  Gyration is
controlled by a programmable microprocessor; all  information
is stored in a nonvolatile solid state memory for retrieval.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
0.05 pci/1 (gases'); 0.002 UL (progeny)
Range:
0.0001 to 9°.999 WL
0.01 to 99999 pci/1
0-99999 cpm
                                     167

-------
Interferences:
Multiparameter
Capability:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              8-4
                                                              EDA RGA-40Q
                                                              Radon Gas Monito"
                                                              2 of 4
RaJon-222, radon-J20, polonium-218,  polonib .-214,
pclom'um-216, bismuth-212, and  polom'urn-212,  pljs  working
level

CoViectiop r.fficiency:
Sampling Rate:   1  I/iron, contnjous;  intervals  are  selectable

Accuracy:  _+10%

Reproducibi 1 "ity:   <5%

Linearity:  >90°i

Noise:  <0.1 MUL

Lagtin.e:

Rise Time:

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:  no inherent drift

Span Drift:  no inherent drift


Temperature R:,ige:  -10° to 50° C

Temperatute Compensation-  none

Relative Humidity Rcnge:  0? TO 100%

Calibration:   factory set,  no field calibration required
                                     168

-------
                                                              8-4
                                                              EDA RGA-400
                                                              Radon Gas Monitor
                                                              3 of 4
                     Procedure:

                     Warn-Up Tine:

                     Unattended Period:  2 weeks (498 data blocks at selected
                                         time intervals)

                     Maintenance:

                     Power:  110 V a.c., 60 Hz, internal rechargable standby
                             batteries (up to 10 hours backup without data loss);
                             external d.c. for extended remote applications;
                             220 V a.c., 50 Hz optional
Features:
Costs:
Output:  G4-character alpha-numeric LCD; cotional  thermal
         printer, magnetic cassette recorder or through
         CCU 500 central cor. crol unit; output is
         RS232 compatible

Training:  none required for sampling

Opt'ions:  DCU-400 thermal printer
          DCU-2CO magnetic cassette tape recorder
          CCU-500 central control unit
          RGZ-401 major spare parts kit
          WLX-341 filter cartridge (25 per pack)

RGA-400:  $15, ^0 (includes console, 25 filter cartridges,
           d.c.  Twer cord, external d.c. power cord, minor
           spar; parts kit, manual)
DCU-400:  $2,750
DCU-200:  $3,750
CCU-500:  12,500
RGZ-401:  $35
ULX-341:  $65
Manufacturer:
FDA Instruments, Inc.
5151 Ward Road
Wheat Ridge, Colorado  80033

(303) 422-9112
Tr.LEX:   560681
                                     169

-------
                                                              8-4
                                                              EDA RG/,-400
                                                              Radon Gas Monitor
                                                              4 of 4
                     Head Office:
                     1 Thorncliffe Park Drive
                     Toronto, Canada M4H1G9
                     (416) 425-7800

                     TELFX:   06 23222 EDA TOR
                     Cables:  INSTRUMENTS TORONTO
References:
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

Operations experience

    1.  None available
Remarks:
Ine unit nay be operated as a stand-alone monitor;
or by using the CCU-5QO central  control  unit.  Distri-
buted sampling networks can be formed with central
data collection.

A high-quality humdity sensor has been  incorporated
to monitor the relative humidity level  of the pre-
filtered ambient air.  The data    om the relative
hunidity sensor are used to compensate  for variances
in radon and thoron gas concentrations  due to detector
efficiency changes.  The teinperat'^e of  the prefiltered
ambient air is measured, as well.

The following functien/parameters c  ~e available:
                     Rn/Tn  gas
                     Rn/TN  ambient
                     PCL
                     Rn/Tn  WL
                     INTGRWL
                       Alarm level  max
                       Sample interval
                       Date  time
                       Spectrum
                       Start data  dump
                       Store data  dump
                       Data  recall
                                     170

-------
                                   RADON
                        STATIOtnRY/ACTIVE/ANALYZER
                                         8-5
                                         EDA
                                         WLM-300
                                         1 of 4
                                              Weight:   6.8 kg

                                              Dimensions:   342 x 304 x 350  mm
Principl e of
Operation:
Filtration/alpha detection.  Radon daughter products
are collected on a filter.  Alpha activity is  detected,
averaged, and recorded.  Working levels are recorded
over periods of 1 hour (or 0.1 hour,  selectable)  for  up
to 41 days.  Operation is controlled  by an internal
microprocessor.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
0.0001 WL
Range:
0.0001 to 100 WL
Interferences:
                                     171

-------
Multiparameter
Capability:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              8-5
                                                              EDA
                                                              WLM-300
                                                              2  of  4
Sampling  Rate:   1  1/min,  continuous

Accuracy:  +10%  (maximum  deviation)

Reproducibility:   <5%

L-'nearity:   >_90%

Moise:  0.0001 WL

Lagtii.ie:

Rise Time:

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:  no inherent  drift

Span Drift:  no inherent  drift


Temperature  Range:  -10°  to 50° C

Temperature  Compensation:  none

Relative Humidity  Range:  0% to 100%

Calibration:  factory set; no field calibration needed

Procedure:

Warm-Up Time:
                                     172

-------
                                                              8-5
                                                              EDA
                                                              WLM-300
                                                              3 of 4
                     Unattended Period:  41 days

                     Maintenance:  The unit is designed for field operation in
                                   a typically hostile environment.   Generally.
                                   it needs very little maintenance  under
                                   nomal operating conditions.

                     Power:  110 a.c., 60 Hz, internal  rechargable or
                             9.5 to 14.0 V d.c. external;  220 a.c.,  50 Hz optional
Features:
Output:


Training:

Options:
         5-digit LCD; thermal printer, magnetic cassette
         recorder, and RS-232 I/O parts

           none required for sampling
          DCU-400 thermal  printer,  a.c. /d.c.
          DCU-040 thermal  printer
          DCU-200 magnetic cassette tape recorder,
          WLX-341 filter discs (25  per pack)
          ULX-351 15 cm extension legs,  set of 4
          WLZ-301 major spare parts kit
                                                                        a.c. /d.c
Costs:
WLM-300:  $6,550 (consists of console,  25 filter discs,
          a.c. powsr cord, minor spare  parts kit,  manual)
DCU-400:  $2,750
DCU-040:  $1,000
DCU-200:  $3,750
WLX-341:  $60  -
WLX-351:  $45
WLX-301:  $35
Manufacturer:
EDA Instruments, Inc.
5151 Ward Road
Wheat Ridge, Colorado  80033

(303) 422-9112
TELEX:   450681
                                     17;

-------
                     Head Office:
                     1 Thorncliffe Park Drive
                     Toronto, Canada M4H169

                     TELEX:   06 23222 EDA TOR
                     Cables:   INSTRUMENTS TORONTO
                                                              8-5
                                                              EDA
                                                              WLM-300
                                                              4 of 4
References:
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin, WLM-300-0291

Operations experience

    1.  None available
Remarks:
Mechanically, the WLM-300 is rugged and environmentally
protected to permit operation in hostile outside
environments.  The unit is lightweight and is powered
by line supplies for use in residential or inside
industrial applications.  For more remote sites, an
external 9.5 t~ 14.0 V d.c. power may be used or the
internal standby batteries may be used to fully
operate the unit for up to 10 hours.

The WLM-300 is simplified by the internal  microprocessor,
and manual operations amount to replacing the prepackaged
filter disc when it becomes loaded, initiating a sampling
sequence, and extracting the data from memory.  Calibration
is unnecesary4  The pump is feedback controlled to 1 1/m
over the entire operating temperature range for up to
152 cm H2>0 back pressures.  The operator has full  access to
the last recorded results through the key pad and a liquid
crystal display.  Also a number of indicators act as a visual
verification of keyed entries and system operation.
                                     174

-------
                                   RADON
                       STATIONARY/PASSIVE/COLLECTOR
                                         8-6
                                         EDA
                                         PERM
                                         RDT-310
                                         1 of 4
                                              Weight:  4.5 kg

                                              Dimensions:  250 mm diameter x 250 mm
Principle of
Operation:
Electrostatic collection/thermoluminescent dosimetry.
Ambient radon diffuses into a chamber where subsequent
disintegration of ions are electrostatically focused onto a
therrnol uminescant dosimeter (TLD) chip held at negative
potential  in a 900-volt electrostatic field.  Each alpha
pa* tide striking the chip creates metastab'ie defects in the
crystal, which can be read and related to integrated radon
concentration.  An intervening layer of indictor-quality
silica gel  and a filter en;ure that the air within the sample
chamber is  desiccated and parlicle free.  A second TLD chip.
is exposed  away from the electrostatic field (in the base of
the housing) to check background levels of gamna radiation.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
0.03 pci/1/week (LiF TLD)
Range:


Interferences:
                                     175

-------
Multiparameter
Capability:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              8-6
                                                              EDA
                                                              PERM
                                                              RDT-310
                                                              2 of 4
Radon only


Sampling Rate:  diffusion, continuous

Accuracy:

Reproducibility:

Linearity:

Noise:

Lagtime:

Response Time:  5 hours with Whatman #41 filter

Rise Time:

Retention Time:

Fall Tine:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift

Detector Response (LiF)--alpha 7.8+0.3 counts per
                         pCi-hr/1
                       —gamma 0.036 counts per R/h  per hour


Temperature Range: <10° to >30° C

Temperature Comppnsation:

Relative Humidity Range:    0%  to 80% for extended  periods

Calibration:

Procedure:
                                     176

-------
                                                              8-6
                                                              EDA
                                                              PERM
                                                              RDT-310
                                                              3 of 4
Features:
Warm-Up Time:  none

Unattended Period:  >1 week (see remark #2)

Maintenance:  replace desiccant as needed, check battery
              supply voltage

Power:  3 Everready Mini-max No. 493 batteries


Output:  nanocoulonbs from TLD reader

Training:  none required for sampling

Options and Accessories:  RDX-727, battery, set of 3
                          RDX-351, spare oesiccant chamber
                          RDX-458, replacement silica gel
                          20 cm Uhatman Ml filter
Costs:
Manufacturer:
RDT-310:  S575 (complete with batteries, desiccant,
special shipping carton, and manual; TLD chips available
upon request)
RDX-727:  $30 each
RDX-351:  S225
RPX-458 silica gel (per kg):  $10
F'lters:  $10

EDA Instruments, Inc.
')151 Ward Road
Wheat Ridge, Colorado  80033

(303) 422-9122
TELEX:   450681

Head Office:
1 Thorncliffe Park Drive
Toronto, Canada M4H.1G9

(416) 425-7800
TELEX:   06 23222 EDA TOR
Cables:  INSTRUMENTS TORONTO
                                     177

-------
                                                              8-6
                                                              EDA
                                                              PERM
                                                              RDT-310
                                                              4 of 4
References:           Specifications

                         1.   Manufacturer's bulletin
                         2.   George,  A.C.   1977.   "A Passive Environmental  Radon
                             Monitor."   In Radon  Workshop.   A.J.  Breslin,  ed.
                             U.S.  Energy Research and Development Administra-
                             tion, Report HASL-325,  Health  and Safety Laboratory,
                             New York,  New York,  pp. 25-30.

                     Operations experience

                         1.   None  available
Remarks:              This instrument is based on the Passive Environmental
                     Radon Monitor (PERM)  developed at the DOE  Environmental
                     Measurements  Laboratory (George 1977).

                     Ordinary unattended exposure periods  for this  instru-
                     ment exceed 1 week.  The upper linit  of exposure  is
                     operationally limited by desiccant life, which is
                     determined by humidity.  The dessicant can  be  baked
                     in a home or  laboratory oven and reused.
                                     178

-------
                                   RADON
                         STATIONARY/ACTIVE/AHALYZER
                                         8-7
                                         Harshaw
                                         Radon Daughters Analyzer
                                         1 of 3
                                              Weight:   32 kg
                                              Dimensions:
                                      detector,
                                      computer,
50
12
x 35 x 40 cm
x 10 x 10 cm
Principle of
Operation:
Filtration/alpha and beta spectroscopy.   Sample air is
drawn through a filter for 2 minutes.  Simultaneously,
alpha and beta backgrounds are measured.   The sample
deposit on the filter is transported to  the detector
where alpha counts (entrance side of filter)  and beta
counts (exit side of filter) are simultaneously registered
for 2 minutes.  Radium A and radium C' are spectroscopically
separated by energy.  Concentrations of  radium A,  radium B,
and radium C' plus working levels are computed automatic!!ly.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
<0.001 WL
Range:


Interferences:
<0.001 to 100 WL
At extremely high working levels (>100 WL),  the  resulting
gama background interferes with the performance  of the
beta detector.
                                     179

-------
Multiparameter
Capability:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              8-7
                                                              Harshaw
                                                              Radon Daughters Analyzer
                                                              2 of 3
Radium A, radium B, radium C' and working levels


Sampling Rate:  30 to 60 1/trrin. continuous over 2-minute
                intervals

Accuracy:

Reproducibility:  1% at 10"3 UL. 2% at 102 WL

Linearity:  good

Uoise:

Lagtime:

Rise -Time:

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift;

Span Drift:


Temperature Range: -10° to 40°C

Temperature Compensation:   none needed

Relative Humidity Range:  no effect

Calibration:  standard source for detectors;  flow meter
              for sample flow

Warm-Up Time:   none
                                     180

-------
                                                              8-7
                                                              Harshaw
                                                              Radon Daughters Analyze*
                                                              3 of 3
                     Unattended Period:  1000 samples dee remark #1)

                     Maintenance:   exhaust filter should be changed periodically;
                                   sample filters can be reused as long as  clean

                     Power:   110 V a.c.
Features:
Output:  8-digit LCD; thermal printer

Training:  none required for sampling

Options:
Costs:


Manufacturer:
$17,000
The Harshaw Chemical Company
Crystal and Electronics Department
6801 Cochran Road
Solon, Ohio  44139

(216) 248-7400
References:
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's I  "Hetin, November 1980

    2.  M. Cox, Harshaw Chemical Company,
        personal communication,  1982

Operations experience

    1.  Mone available
Remarks:
With proyrammed time delays between samples,  unattended
operc  ion is limited by data storage of 1,000 data
points.

Users  include F!'A, DOE contractors, and a number of
state  deoartments or health
                                     181

-------
                                   RADON
                       STATIONARY/PASSIVE/COLLECTOR
                           550007
                                         TZk.^DEX TRACK ETCHR
                                         PADON DETECTOR
                                         1 of 4
                                      »^?_--.
                             Weight:   Negligible

                             Dimensions:   Type  B  (total  alpha):  6 en square card
                                          Types F, M, and C:   9.5 cm high; 7.2 cm
                                           widest diameter
                                          Types SF and  SM:  2,2 cm high; 3.7 C,T,
                                           widest diameter
Principl e of
Operation:
Passive ir   Cation v;f rddon exposure.   Mpia  particles
from radon    air cr from radon progeny that have  plated
out on adjacent surfaces penetrate the  Detector  and  cause
carnage tracks.   The damage tracks are chemically etch3d
at the end of the exposure interval  and counted.   Av'"age
ensure  is proportional  to the counted tracks per unit
area.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
0.16 (pCi/I)-months (standard).   Lower detectable  limits
are possible at an increased cost.
Range:
0.16 to 104 (pCi/I)-months;  corresponds  to  0.003  to
200 WL-,nonths at a WL ratio  of 0.5'
Interferences:
None
                                    182

-------
                                                              8-8
                                                              TERRADEX TRACK ETCHR
                                                              RADON DETECTOR
                                                              2 of 4
Multiparameter
Capability:
Type B measures total alpha activity (radon plus progeny!
Performance:
Sampling Rat-3:  diffusion, continuous

Accurjcy:  1.8% to 2.8% (relative standard deviation of
           calibration factor (liter and Fleisher 1981)

Reproducibility:  no batch-to-batch differences outside
                  of normal counting statistics
Operati on:
Features:
Temperature Range-  -50° to 70° C

Temperature Compensation:   none required

Relative Humidity Range:  0% to 100%

Calibration:  none required in use

Procedure:  static device,  requires o"1y placement and
            retrieval  of detector

Unattended Period:  depending upon application,  <1 month
                    to >1 year

Maintenance:  none

Power:  none required  for  sampling


Output:  data report from manufacturer

Training:  None is requir?d for sampling;  simple deploy-
           ment instructions are supplied  by manufacturer.

Options:   Orders ray specify "read as  needed" to increase
          sensitivity; see  cost section.
                                     183

-------
Costs:
                                                              8-8
                                                              TERRADL'X TRACK ETCHR
                                                              RADON DETECTOR
                                                              3 of 4
Prices are controlled by number of detectors and desired
sensitivity.  For a minimum'order of 50 detectors, the
following schedule applies.  Price includes readout and
report of results.
                     Sensitivity Level*
                       (p Ci/1)-months

                            4.0
                            1.0
                            0.2
                               Price per Detector

                                      $16.50
                                       33.00
                                       66.00
                     (*Radon exposure for which the statistical  uncertainty
                       is 50%.)

                     If fewer than 50 detectors are ordered in 1  year,  the
                     service price is $50 per detector.   At increased  cost,
                     the manufacturer can reread the detectors to an  increased
                     sensitivty  1evel.
Manufacturer:
Terredex Corporation
460 North Wiget Lane
Walnut Creek, California

(415) 938-2545
TELEX:  337-793
                                               94598
References:
Specifications

    1.   Manufacturers bulletin

    2.   Alter, H.W.,  and R.L.  Fleisher.   1981.   "Passive
        Integrating Radon Monitor ^or  Environmental
        Monitoring."   Health  Phys.  40:693.
                                     184

-------
                                                              8-8
                                                              TERRADEX TRACK ETCHR
                                                              RADON DETECTOR
                                                              4 of 4
                     Operations experience

                         1.  Alter, H.W.  1981.  "Track Etch ™ Radon Detector
                             Calibrations and Field Results."  Presented at the
                             U.S. Environnu  .tal Protection Agency International
                             Meeting on Radon and Radon Progeny Measurement.
                             Montgomery, Alabama.

                         2.  Alter, H.W.  1981.  "Indoor Radon Levels.  Field
                             Expedience using the Track Etch™ Method."  Presented
                             at the International Symposium on Indoor Ail-
                             Pollution, Health, and Energy Conservation.  Amherst,
                             Massachusetts.

                         3.  Gingrioh, J.E., et dl.   ;982.  "Monitoring
                             Radon Around Uranium Mine and Mill  Sites with
                             Passive Integrating Detectors."  Presented at the
                             International  Symposium on Management of Wastes
                             from Uranium Mining and Milling, Albuquerque,
                             New Mexico.

                         4.  Altei, H.W., ;nd R.A.  Oswald.  1983.   "Results
                             of Indoor Radon Measurements Using  the Track Etch
                             Method."   Accepted for publication,  Health Phys.
Remarks:             After the detector has been processed, it is itself
                     a permanent record of the exposure and can be reread
                     at any time.  The manufacturer stores the exposed
                     detector for future reference.

                     Shelf "life of Track Etch detectors is 1 year if
                     stored in packging provided by manufacturer.
                                     185

-------
                               SULFUR  DIOXIDE
                         PERSONAL/ACTIVE/ANALYZER
                                                9-1
                                                INTERSCAN
                                                SCb  1240 and  424C
                                                1 of  3
                               W?ight:
                                                       3.6 kg, Model 1240
                                                       2.0 kg, Model 4240
                                              Dimensions:
                                            18.4 cm x 1.5.2 cm x
                                              29.2 mir, Model 1240
                                            17.8 cm x 10.2 cm x
                                              22.5 en, Model 4240
Principle of
Operation:
      Electrochemical oxidation.  Gas molecules from the moving
      sample air stream pass through a diffusion medium and are
      adsorbed onto an electrocatalytic sensing electrode where
      subsequent reactions generate an electric current.  The
      diffusion limited current is linearly proportional to
      concentration.
Lower Detectable     \% of full scale
Limit:
Range:
      0 to 1 ppm, 0 to 5 ppm, 0 to 10 ppm (other ranges available)
Interferences:
      Expressed as parts per million of interferent needed to give
      1 ppm deflection:

      C12:  >500        H2:       >500      NH.3:     45
       CO:  >500   SAT. HC:        >104      NO:   >500
UNSAT.  HC:  >500       N02:         10      $03:    >104

      C2H5SH,  H2S, and CH3$H require a special  filter.
                                     186

-------
Multiparameter
Capabi1ity:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              9-1

                                                                  1240 and 4240
                                                              2 of 3
Sf)2 only


Sampling Rate:  continuous

Accuracy:  +2% of full scale

Reproducibility:  +0.5%

Linearity: +1% of full scale

Noi se:

Lagtime:  <1 second

Rise Time:  20 seconds

Retention Time:

Fall  Time:  20 seconds

Zero Drift:  +1% full scale in 24 hours

Span Drift:  <+2% ful" scale in 24 hours


Temperature Range: 10° to 120° F

Temperature Compensation:

Relative Hu^'dity Range:

Calibration:  Standard gas mixture

Warm-Up Time:
                                     187

-------
                                                              9-1
                                                              INTERSCAN
                                                              S02 1240 and 4240
                                                              3 of 3
                     Unattended Period:  10 hours on battery power

                     Maintenance:

                     Power:  4 Alkaline f'n02 batteries for amplifier,
                             2 Ni -Cd for punps LCD; 1 HgO battery for bias
                             amplifier reference
Features:
Costs:
Output:  0 to 100 nV full scale

Training:  none required for sampling

Options:  1240, audible and visual alarm;
          4240, audible alarr.i

Model 1240:   $1,675
Model 4240:   31,895
Manufacturer:
InterScan Corporation
P.O. Box 2496
21700 liordhof^ Street
Chatsworth, California  91311

(213) 882-2331
TELEX:   67-4897
References:
Remarks:
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

Operations experience

    1.  Hone avjilahle
                                     188

-------
                              S'JLFUR DIOXIDE
                         PERSONAL/PASSIVE/ANALYZER
                                                              9-2
                                                              INTERSCAN
                                         1  of 3
Principle of
Operation:
                                           i
                                           \   Weight:   680 g (including leather
                                          J                  case)

                                              Dimensions:   152 x 76 x 51 mm
Diffusion/electrochemistry.   Sulfur dioxide diffuses
into an electrochemical  cell,  producing a signal  pro-
portional  to SO;? concentrations.   The signal  is digitized,
incorporated into 1-minute averages,  and stored.   Nondes-
tructive recovery of each 1-minute average is accomplished
through a separate data  reader.   Data storage capacity
is 2,048 1-minute averages.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
0.5% of full scale
Range:
10 x TLV (TLV   2 pprn)
Interferences:
Expressed as parts per million of interferent needed to
give 1 ppm deflection:
                     C12:   >500
                      CO:   >500
               UNSAT.  HC:   >500
                       H2:   >500
                  SAT. HC:    >104
                      N02:     10
NK3:     45
 NO:   >500
S03:
                           ,  H2$, and Q^SH require a specidl  filter.
                                     189

-------
                                                              9-2
                                                              INTERSCAN
                                                              5240
                                                              2 of 3
Multi p^rame ter
Capability:


Performance:
Operation:
 S02  only


 Sampling  Rate:   diffusion,  continuous

 Accuracy:  +2%  of  reading.  +1  least significant digit (LSD),
           +0.5°; of FS  (digital)

 Reproducibility:   +1* reading, +1 LSD

 Linearity:   0.5" reading, + 1 LSD

 (Joise:

 Lagtime:

 Rise Tine:   20  seconds

 Retention Time:

 Fall Time:   20  seconds

 Zero Drift:  +1% reading, _+! LSD in 24 hours

 Span Drift   +1% reading, +1 LSD in 24 hours


 Temperature  Range:   30° to 120° F

 Temperature  Compensation:

 Relative l!u:,iidity Range:  1% to 100%

 Calibration:  standard gas mixture

 Warm-Up Time:   <5 r.mutes

 Unattended Period:   up to 34 hours

Maintenance:  calibration, battery replacement, sensor
              replacen?nt
                                     190

-------
                                                              9-2
                                                              INTERSCAN
                                                              5240
                                                              3 of 3
                     Power:   long life 9-volt battery (Alkaline manganese
                             dioxide, NEDA type 1604A);  battery life  is  125
                             hours continuous operation
Features:
                     Output:   printout from data  reader (see  remark #

                     Training:   none required for sampling
Costs:


Manufacturer:
                     Model  5240:   $1,1^5
                     InterScan Corporation
                     P.O.  Box 2496
                     21700 Nordhoff Street
                     Chatsworth,  California  91311
References:
                     (213)  882-2331
                     TELEX:   67-4897

                     Specifications

                         1.   Manufacturer's  bulletin

                     Operations experience

                         1.   None available
                     Data  readout is accomplished  by  a  device available
                     from:

                             Metrosonics,  Inc.
                             P.O.  Box 23075
                             Rochester,  New  York   14692

                             '716)  334-7300

                     InterScan  has  also  recently introduced  the
                     Model  2240 SOj personal  monitor, which  offers
                     an  LCD display of concentration  instead of
                     the data logging.
                                     191

-------
                              SULFUR DIOXIDE
                         PORTABLE/ACT IVE/ANALYZER
                                         9-3
                                         TGM 555
                                         SULFUR DIOXIDE ANALYZER
                                         i of 3
                                              Weight:  14 kg

                                              Dimensions:  51 x 41 x 18 cm
Principle of
Operation:
Automated wet cnenvistry/colorimetry.  Sample air is con-
tinuously drawn through distilled water.  Absorbed sample
is reacted w'th pararosaniline and formaldehyde to form
intensely colored pararosaniline methyl  sulfuric acid,
whose intensity is measured at 550 nm.  Reagent handling
and processing is automatic.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
0.003 ppm (on 0 to 0.25 ppm full  scale)
Range:
0 to 0.25 ppm (adjustable to 10 ppm)
Interferences:
                                     192

-------
Multiparameter
Capnbi1 ity:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              9-3
                                                              TGM 555
                                                              SULFUR PIOXIDF. AMALYZER
                                                              2 of 3
Sampling Rate:  250 ml/min, continuous

Accuracy:

Reproducibility:  ]»

Linearity:  <2^ (up to 1 ppn)

Noise:

Lagtime:  6 minutes

Rise Tine:  4 minutes to 95*

Retention Time:

Fall Tine:  4 minutes to 95"

Zero Drift:  <2l for 24 hours

Span Drift:  <2a. for 24 hours


Temperature Range:   5° to 43° C

Temperature Compensation:

Relative Humidity Range:   5C; to 95^

Calibration:  liquid standards, permeation tubes,  or
              standard gas dilution
                                     193

-------
Features:
Costs:
Manufacturer:
References:
                                                              9-3
                                                              TG/1 555
                                                              SULFUR DIOXID: ANALYZER
                                                              3 uf 3
Warm-Up Time:  20 minutes

Unattended Period:  18 hours on fully charged batteries

Maintenance:  pump tubes changed once a month

Power:  12 V d.c. unregulated, 4 watts 115/230 V a.c., 50/CO Hz


Output:  digital panel meter

Training:  none reauired for sampling

Options:  stream splitter (to extend range by a factor
          of 10 or 100)


TGM 555:  5^,395

Stream Splitter:  S295
CEA Instruments, Inc.
15 Char!es Street
Westwood, New Jersey  07675
                     *•
(201)  654-2300
TELEX:  642128
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

Operations experience

    1.  None available
Remarks:
                                     194

-------
                                                              iO-1
                                                              DATA LOGSING
                                DATA LOGGING                  HETROSONICS
                         PERSONAL/ACTIVE/COLLECTCR            dl-331
                                                              1 of 4
                                              Weight:  250 grams

                                              Dimensions:  25.4 x 7.6 x 2.2 cni


Principle of         Signal voltage is sampled and placed in temporary storage
Operation:           four times each second.  At the end of every program-
                     selected interval (10 seconds, 1 minute,  5 minutes, or
                     15 minutes), the average is calculated and stored time
                     sequentially along with maximum peak value.  At the end of
                     the sampling period, the solid state memory is  interrogated
                     by a data reader that carries out selected calculations and
                     prints out recorded data along with hourly and  cumulaiive
                     summaries, the 5-, 10-, and 15-minute intervals exhibiting
                     highest values, and the peak value for the collection
                     period.


Lower Detectable
Limit:


Range:                0 to 100 mV, 500 mV, 1 V,  5 V (others available upon
                     request); two Significant digits, one multiplier digit


Interferences:
                                     195

-------
Multiparameter
Capability:
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              10-1
                                                              DATA LOGGING
                                                              METROSONICS
                                                              dl-331
                                                              2 of 4
Single data channel plus time


Sampling Rate:   4 scans per second, continous

Accuracy:  +0.5%

Reproducibility:

Linearity:

Noise:

Lagtime:

Rise Time:

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift:


Temperature Range:  -20° to 60° C

Temperature Compensation:

Relative Humidity Range:  to 90%

Calibration:

Procedure:

Warm Up Time:

Unattended Period:  Limited by total  of 2,048 data values
                    (See remark #1)

Maintenance:
                                     196

-------
Requi remonts:


Features:
                                         10-1
                                         DATA LOGGING
                                         MCTROSONICS
                                         dl-331
                                         3 of 4

Power:  9-volt battery


Output:  (See remark *2)

Training:  none required for sampling

Options:  (See remark £3)

          db-651V10      Table top METROREADER
          db-652V10      Portable METROREADER
          uk-651/V10     Modification kit (to update
                         earlier readers for dl-331)
          uk-652/V10     Modification kit (to update
                         earlier readers for dl-331)
          dc-431         METROMODEi-1 to interface data
                         logger to reader by phone lines
          cc-305         Environmental  case for METROLOGGER
          ps-331         External  power supply for
                         extended operation
          vr-331         Voltage reference source
Costs:
          dl-331
          db-651V10
          db-652V10
          uk-651/V10
          uk-G52/V10
          dc-431
          cc-305
          ps-331
          vr-331
51,245
 3,245
 3,895
   495
   495
   925
   150
    50
   225
Manufacturer:
METROSONICS, Inc.
P.O. Box 23075
Rochester, New York  14692

(716) 334-7300
References:
Specifications

    1.   Manufacturer's bulletin
                                     197

-------
                                                              10-1
                                                              DATA LOGGING
                                                              METROSONICS
                                                              dl-331
                                                              4 of 4
                     Operations experience

                         1.  None available
Remarks:             The data logger has a capacity of 2,048 incremented
                     data values.  Thus, total  sample period is ultimately
                     limited by selected program interval  as follows:

                                                      Total
                               Interval            Sampling Time

                              10 seconds             5.6 hours
                               1 minute              34   hours
                               5 minutes           170   hours
                              15 minutes            21   days

                     Battery life is in  excess  of 120 hours; operation
                     can be extended by  addition of external battery  or
                     external  power supply.

                     The METROREADER (db-651/V10 or db 652/V10) offers
                     a direct printout onto  2-1/2 inch wide thermal
                     paper.  Optional  interfaces allow direct transfers
                     to xy plotters or to computer systems.   The data
                     logger itself does  not  allow for intermittent
                     readings during sampling.

                     The options listed  here have been selected from
                     a much longer list.

                     The db-651/V10 and  db-652/V10 readers are also
                     used to output data collected by the  InterScan 5140
                     CO monitor (summary fA3-5,  this appendix).

                     METROSONICS has successfully interfaced the dl-331
                     data logging system to  a  number of industrial
                     monitoring situations.
                                     198

-------
                               DATA  LOGGING                    10-2
                          PERSONAL/ACTIVE/ANAYZER              MAGUS GROUP DL-1
                                                               1 of 3
                          PHOTOGRAPH UNAVAILABLE
                                              Weight:  482 g

                                              Dimensions:  7.6 x 15.2 x 5.1 crn
Principles of        Signal voltage is read every second and incorporated into
Operation:           a running average.  At the end of the averaging period
                     (1-hour in automatic mode) tne average value along with
                     day and time information is stored, the average is reset
                     to zero, and a new average begins.  Ea.:h logged average  •
                     is retrievable.
Lower Detectable
Limit:               1 mV
Range:               -199 mV to 199 mV


Interferences:       None
Multiparameter
Capability:          signal voltage, day, and time at each logging cycle
                                     199

-------
Performance:
Operation:
                                                              10-2
                                                              MAGUS GROUP DL-i
                                                              2 of 3
Sampling  Rate:   1  scan  p-r  se:ond, continous

Accuracy:   0.5%

Repeatibi1ity:   0.5%

Linearity:   0.5%

Noise:

Lag Time:   <1 second

Ri se Time:  <1 second

Retention  Time:

Fall Time:   <1 second

Zero Drift:  <0.5 mV

Span Drift:  0.5%


Temperature  Range:  0 to 40° C

Temperature  Compensation:  none

Relative Humidity Range:  0% to 99%

Calibration:  factory procedure

Warm Up Time:  None

Unattended Period:  113 hours (limited by storage capacity-
                    see remark #1}

Maintenance:  >i year, except for periodic recharging of
              Ni-Cd batteries

Power:   Six AA Ni-Cd batteries; reference battery is
        2 mercury hearing aid batteries
                                     200

-------
                                                              10-2
                                                              MAGUS CROUP DL-1
                                                              3 of 3
Features:
Output:  4-digit LCD; 113 logged points

l^aining:  none required for sampling

Options:  See remark #2
Costs:


Manufacturer:
DL-1:  $865 each; quantity discounts are available
MAGUS GROIP
2251 Grand Ro^d, Suite A
Los Altos, California  94022

(415) 964-3230
References:
Specifications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

Operations experience

    1.  None available
Remarks:
Current data storage capacity is 113 data points.
Automatic mode increments storage function each
hour, thus limiting unattended manual  operation to
113 hours.

The manufacturer is currently developing a number  of
options and improvements to the DL-1.   Direct dumping
of logged data to a general  purpose computer should
be available by late 1982.

Available time did not permit review of this summary
by a manufacturer's representative.
                                     201

-------
                                                              10-3
                               DATA LOGGING                   DATA LOGGING
                         PERSONAL/ACTIVE/ANALYZER             CUSTOM INSTRUMENTS
                                                              1 of 3
                          PHOTOGRAPH UNAVAILABLE
                                              Weight:  240 g

                                              Dimensions:  11 x 7 x 4.8 cm
Principle of         Signal voltage is quantitatively converted to frequency
Operation:           and a counter stores a running time-voltage integral.
                     An independent LCD watch is mounted to display time.
Lower Detectable
Limit:
Range:               0-250 mV standard (other ranges available)


Interferences:       none
Multiparameter
Capability:          Integrated time-voltage, time
                                     202

-------
Performance:
Operation:
F'eatures:
                                                               10-3
                                                               DATA  LOGGING
                                                               CUSTOM  INSTRUMENTS
                                                               2  of  3
Sampling Rate:  continuous

Accuracy:

Repeatabil ity:

Linearity:   1% over 0 to 40° C

Noise:

Lag Time:

Rise Time:

Retention Time:

Fall Time:

Zero Drift:

Span Drift:


Temperature Range:  0 to 40° C

Temperature Compensation:  None required at 0 to 40° C

Relative Humidity Range:

Calibration:  External  reference signal

Warm- Up Time:  None

Unattended Period:  40  hours nominal

Maintenance:

Power:   9- volt battery
Output:  4-digit LED display for integrated time-voltage;
         LCD for time
                                     203

-------
                                                              10-3
                                                              DATA LOGGING
                                                              CUSTOM INSTRUMENTS
                                                              3 of 3
                     Training:  none required for sampling

                     Options:  See remark #2
Costs:
Each:  S350

Lots of 10:  $300 each
Manufacturer:
Custom Instrumentation
1027 Euclid Street
Santa Monica, California  90403

(213) 393-4760
References:
Speci fications

    1.  Manufacturer's bulletin

Operations experience                             ,

    1.  Nagda, M.L., and M.D. Koontz.   1983. Exposures to
        Carbon Monoxide.  GEOMET Report Ho.* EHF-1200.
        GEOMET Technologies, Inc., Rockville, Maryland.
Remarks:
The CI Data Logger was originally designed for use
with the GE Carbon Monoxide Detector (see summary A3-3,
this appendix), but is compatible with any analog signal
source that meets input signal  requirements.

The manufacturer will  meet specific requirements for
modification or changes at additional  cost.

Available time did not permit review of this  summary
by a manufacturer's representative.
                                     204

-------
EPA REFERENCE AND EQUIVALENT METHODS

   .  Continuous analyzers for CO, N02, SO?, and 03 that appear on EPA's
"List of Designated Reference and Equivalent Methods" are enumerated here.
Table A-2 displays the performance specifications fo«- S02, 03, CO, and
NO,?.  Specific instruments that have been designated reference or equivalent
for each pollutant P.re iisted in Table A-3.  Addresses and telephone numbers
of manufacturers are contained in Table A-4.

GLOSSARY OF INSTRUMENT TERMS

Principle of Operation:  The chemical or physical basis for the measurement
                         technique.

Lower Detectable Limit:  The smallest quantity or concentration that causes a
                         response equal to at least twice the noise level.

Range:  The lower and upper detectable limits.  Often, syncnymous with full
        scale.

Interferences:  Any substance or effect other than the measurement parameter
                that causes a measurable response in the instrument output.

Multiparameter Capability:  The ability to measure more than one pollutant
                            or parameter-

Collection Period:  The amount of time specified to acquire sufficient
                    sample mass.

Accuracy:  The percentage difference between measured values and true values
           that have been established by acceptable reference methods.
           Accuracy is generally referenced to full-scale reading of the
           output.

Reproducibility:   The degree of variation obtained when the same measurement
                  is made with similar instruments and different operators;
                  often expressed as a percentage of full  scale.

Linearity:  The maximum deviation between instrument response and the reading
            predicted from linear interpolation between calibration points at
            upper and lower scale values; often expressed as a percentage of
            full  scale.

Noise:  Spontaneous deviation from a mean output ~ot attributable to input
        changes;  often expressed es a percentage -jf full  scale.

Lagtime:  The time interval  that elapses between a stepwise increase of input
          and the first corresponding change in output.
                                     205

-------
        Table A-2.  PERFORMANCE: SPECIFICATIONS FOR AUTOMATED METHODS
Performance parameter Units*
1.
2.
3.
4.


5.
6.


7.
8.
9.
10.


Source
Range
Noise
Lower detectable limit
Interference equivalent
Each interfprent
Total interferent
Zero drift, 12 and 24 hours
Span drift, 24 hours
20% of upper range limit
80% of upper range limit
Lag time mi
Rise time mi
Fall time mi
Precision
20% of upper range limit
80% of upper range limit
: L.J. Purdue, "EPA Reference
ppm
ppm
ppm

ppm
ppm
ppm

%
%
nutes
nutes
nutes

ppm
ppm
Sulfur Photochemical Carbon
dioxide oxitiants (ozone) monoxide
0-0. b
-0.005
0.01

+0.02
+0.06
+ 0.02

+20.0
+5.0
20
15
15

0.01
0.015
and Equivalent Methods
0-0.5
0.005
0.01

+0.02
+0.06
+0.02

+20.0
+5.0
20
15
15

0.01
0.01
,'• J. Air
0-50
0.50
1.0

+1.0
+ 1.5
+ 1.0

+10.0
+2.5
10
5
5

0.5
0.5
Pollut. Control
Nitrogen
dioxide
0-0.5
0.005
0.01

+0.02
-,•0.04
+_0.02

+20.0
+5.0
20
15
15

0.02
0.03

Assoc. (30)9:992-96,  Sept.  1980.
                            206

-------
 TABLE A-3.  SUMMARY OF.COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE INSTRUMENTS FOR U.S.
             ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY DESIGNATED REFERENCE
             AND EQUIVALENT METHODS FOR CO, N02,  S02 AND 63.
             (Parenthetical values indicate approved ranges.)
   Pollutant
                Methods
Carbon monoxide
Reference methodr.
Nondispersive infrared (NDIR)

-  Bendix 8501-5CA (50)
   Beckman 866 (50)
-  Horiba AQM-10-11 & 12 (50)
-  Horiba 300E/300SE (20,  50, 1001
-  Monitor Labs 8310 (50)
   MSA 202S (50)

Gas filter correlation (GFC)

-  Dasibi 3003 (50)
-  Thermo Electron 48 (50)
Nitrooen dioxide
Reference methods
Gas phase cheniluminescence
                             Bendix 8101-8SC (0.5)
                             CSI 1600 (0.5)
                             Me Toy NA530R (0.1,  0.25,  0.5,  1.0)
                             Monitor Labs 8440E  (0.5)
                             Monitor Labs 8840 (0.5,  1.0)
                             Phillips PW 9762/02 (0.5)
                             Thermo Electron 14  B/E &  D/E  (0.5)
Ozone
Reference methods
Gas phase chemiluminescence

   Beckman 950A (0.5)
   Bendix 6002 (0.5)
-  CSI 2000 (0.5)
-  McMillan 1100-1,  2  & 3  (0.5)
-  Meloy OA325-2R &  OA350-2R  (0.5!
-  Monitor Labs 8410E  (0,5)
                                                             [continued)
                                 207

-------
                        TABLE A-3.   (Concluded)
   Pollutant
                Methods
Ozone (continued)
Su"lfur dioxide
Equivalent methods
Ultraviolet abborption

   Dasibi 1003-AH, -PC, -RS (0.5, 1.0)
   Ho.iitor Labs 8810 (0.5, 1.0)
   PCI Ozone Corp LC-12 (0.5)
-  Thermo Electron 49 (0.5, 1.0)

Gas-solid phase cheniluminescence

-  Phillips PW 9771 (0.5)
Equivalent rethods
Plane photometric detection (FPD)

-  Bendix 8303 (0.5,  1.0)
   MeIcy SA185-2A (0.5,  1.0)
   Me Toy SA285E (0.05,  0.1, 0,5,  1.0)
-  Monitor Labs 8450  (0.5,  1.0)

Pulsed ultraviolet fluorescence

-  Beckman 953 (0.5,  1.0)
   Lear Siepler AM2020  (0.5)
   I'.elo/ SA700 (0.25,  0.5,  1.0)
   Monitor Labs 8850  (0.5,  1.0)
-  Therno Electron 43  (0.5, 1.0)

Second derivative spectroscopy

-  Lear Siegler SM1000  (0.5)

Automated wet chemical

   Phillips PW9755 &  PW9700 (0.5)
                                   208

-------
TABLE A-4.  MANUFACTURERS OF S'lATIOUARY ANALYZERS THAT APPLAR IN TABLE  A-3
Beckman Instruments
Process Instruments Division
2500 Harbor Boulevard
Fullerton, California  92634
(714) 871-4846

Bendix Corp.,
Environmental  and Process
 Instruments Division
Box 831
Lewisburg, Hest Virginia  24901
(304) 547-4358

Columbia Scientific Industries
Box 99u8
Austin, Texas   7876?
(800) 531-5003

Dasibi Environmental Corp.
616 East Colorado Street
Glendaie, California  91205
(213) 247-7601

Horiba Instruments, Inc.
1021 Duryea Avenue
Irvine, California  92714
(714) 540-7874

Lear Siegler,  Inc.
74 Inverness Drive E
Englewood, Colorado  80112
(303) 770-3300
MSA
600 Penn Center Boulevard
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvaniz  15235
(412) 273-5172

Monitor Labs,  Inc.
10180 Srripps  Range  Boulevard
San Diego, California  92131
(619) 578-5060

PCI Ozone Corp.
One Fairfiold  Crescent
West Caldwell, New  Jersey  07006
1201} 575-7052

Phillips Electronic  Instruments
85 McKee Dri ve
Mahwah, New Jersey   07430
(201) 529-3800

Thermo Electron Corp.
Environmental  Instruments Division
108 South Street
Hopkinton, Massachusetts  01748
(617) 435-5421
                                     209

-------
Rise Time:  The time interval that elapses between a stepwise increase of
            input and an output change equivalent to 90 percent of the input
            increment.

Retention Time:  The time interval that elapses between a stepwise decrease
                 of input and the first corresponding chenge of input.

Fall Time:  The time interval that elapses between a stepwise decreace of
            input and an output change corresponding to 90 percent of the
            input change.

Zero Drift:  The change of output over a stated time interval of unadjusted
             operations when input level is zero.

Span Drift:  The change of output over a stated time interval of unadjusted
             operation when the input level is other than zero.

Temperature Range:   The range of ambient temperatures over which the  instru-
                    ment meets or exceeds performance specifications.

Temperature Conditions:  Mechanisms for adjusting  the performance or  response
                         of temperature-sensitive  components within  the
                         specified ambient temperature range.

Relative Humidity Range:  The range of ambient relative humidities over  which
                          the instrument meets or  exceeds performance
                          speci ficat ions.

Calibration:  The manner in which instrument response is referenced  to known
              standards.

Warm Up Time:   The amount of time required to achieve stable operation from
               initial startup.

Unattended Period:   Tne amount of time over which  the instrument will  meet  or
                    exceed performance specifications.   For many instruments
                    summarized here,  the principal  limitation is battery
                    life.

Maintenance:  Highlights of service intervals recommended by the manufacturer,

Power:   Specifications of alternating current and/or batteries required  to
        operate the instrument.

Output:  Defines the available readouts for the instrument.

-------
Training:  Defines the level of expertise required to operate (but not
           necessarily calibrate or repair) the instrument.  Two categories
           of train-'ng are used:  (1) "none required," implying that it can
           be successfully operated by nontechnical personnel with minimum
           instructions; (2) "recommended," implying that both a technical
           background and training will be needed.  Note that for use of
           passive collectors, deployment can be carried out by nontechnical
           personnel with suitable instruction, but laboratory analysis will
           always require technical  training.

Options:  Additional features and accessories available from the manufacturer,

Costs:  Manufacturer-supplied costs in U.S. dollars as of late 1982.

Manufacturer:  Mailing address, telephone number, and (where available) Telex
               or other special contact information.

References:  Published and other sources of information that were used to
             construct the summary.   Separate listings are offered to denote
             rpecifications (generally manufacturer-supplied material) versus
             operations experience (user-suppled information).

Remarks:  Additional comments that are beyond the scope of the format used.
                                     211

-------
                                APPENDIX B

          ALTERNATIVES TO COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE INSTRUMENTATION:
                       STANDARD AND ACCEPTED METHODS


INTRODUCTION

     Though a relatively wide range of commercially available instruments  for
indoor air quality monitoring has been identified in Appendix A, the possi-
bilities of assembling measurement systems from simple components should not
be ignored.  This approach is frequently the only alternative, expecially  for
personal exposure monitoring, because suitable commercial  instruments are  not
yet available for some pollutants.

     The Gage Research Institute Personal Sampler (Mintz et al.  1982),  which
allows integrated personal sampling for S02, NOj, and particulate matter for
up to 10 hours, is an example of such approach.  The device is built from
commercially available components, makes use of previously tested procedures,
and offers the advantages of size, portability, and multipollutant sampling
that that could not be met from any single commercial source.

     In this appendix, a number of methods are presented for measuring  the
following:

     a    Air exchange rates

     •    Inhalable particulate matter (including chemical
          characterization)

     e    Organic pollutants

     e    Formaldehyde

     9    Radon

     o    Fibrous aerosols.

The methods discussed here either represent standard practices endorsed by
an appropriate organization or accepted technique published in refereed
journals o:* are used by a number of researchers.  Decisions to apply any of
these approaches through in-house fabrication should be made only after
careful review of the references listed at the end of each section.

Reference

Mintz, S., H.R. Hosein, B. Batten, and F. Silverman.  1982.  "A  Personal
     Sampler for Three Respiratory Irritants."  J. Air Pollut. Control
     Assoc. 32(10):1068-69.
                                     212

-------
AIR EXCHANGE

     The continual transfer of air across the building envelope is an important
determinant for indoor pollutant levels.  Depending upon the nature of indoor-
outdoor pollutant contrasts, air exchange can serve to deliver cleaner outdoor
air to reduce indoor levels; or, if outdoor levels exceed indoor levels,  air
exchange may contribute to indoor levels provided the decay of pollutants is
not substantial.  Additionally, because influx air matches outflux, both  pro-
cesses may be occurring simultaneously if two or more pollutants are involved.

     Air exchange is produced from a complex interplay of many factors such
as architecture, wind velocity, orientation of the structure, and indoor-
outdoor temperature differences.  These and other factors are summarized  in
Section 3 of this document.

     Air exchange is commonly expressed in terms of the volume of air exiting
(or entering) the structure per unit time ('".e., CFM or m3/sec).  To allow
direct comparisons among structures of difrering volumes, the air exchange rate
is often standardized against the structural  volume and expressed as air  changes
per hour (ACH).  Thus, an air exchange rate of 1 ACH'l implies that the volume
of air entering (and consequently leaving) the structure in 1 hour is equivalent
to the internal structural volume.

     Four approaches to monitoring air exchange rate will be discussed here.
Two of these—fan pressurization and tracer gas dilution--have been designated
as standard practice by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
for evaluating infiltration rates on a single test basis.  The third method,
developed at the Brookhaven National  Laboratory, can estimate longer term
averages of total  air exchanges, i.e., over sampling periods of several days
or weeks in duration.  A fourth technique, the ASHRAE crack method, relies
upon measurement of the lengths of cracks such as those around windows and
doors for calculation of air exchange.  The summaries described below are
included to introduce the methodology.  Detailed information can be obtained  -
from references indicated at the end of this section.  ASTM (1980) is a
particularly useful  introduction to the topic.

Fan Pressurization

     In the fan pressurization method (ASTM E779-81), the leakage character-
istics of a structure are evaluated under controlled pressurization and
depressurization.   A range of positive and negative indoor-outdoor pressure
differences is produced by using a variable-speed reversible fan,  which is
temporarily installed in an entry doorway.  The fan can move large volumes
of air into or out of the structure.   At a constant indoor-outdoor pressure
difference, all air flowing through the fan is compensated by equal flow
through available openings in the building envelope.  When all  controllable
external  openings such as windows and doors are closed, the resulting data
can be used to evaluate the leakage character of the building envelope and
                                     213

-------
thus fo-m the basis for comparisons of relative tightness.  It shoulo be
noted that this method does not measure infiltration rates directly.  Rather,
it measures the effective leakage area through which infiltration occurs.

     ASTM-spccified equipment includes the following major components:

     9    Air-Moving Equipment—capable of sustained flows up to
          5100 n3/hr (3,000 CFM) at a constant rate

     e    Pressure-Measuring Device—capable of measuring pres-
          sure differentials with an accuracy of +2.5 Pa (+0.01
          inches of water)                       ~        ~~

     e    Air Flow Measuring System—to measure flows to within
          +5 percent over the operating range of the air mover

     e    Air Flow-Regulating System—to regulate and maintain
          flows inc'jced by the air-moving equipment to within
          20 percent or less.

     These components may be integrated to form a blower door assembly  (see
Figure B-l) to facilitate mounting the unit in the doorway and to offer
convenient nlarrr.ont of readouts.  Other configurations are acceptable,
provided the test can proceed within the allowable tolerance limits.   In
addition to the above components, onsite measurements of winds and indoor
and outdoor temoerature are required.

     Complete blower door assemblies that meet the requirements of ASTM E779-81
can be obtained from the following sources:*

               HARMAX Corporation
               6224 Orange Street
               Los Angeles, California  90048
               (213) 936-2673

               Retrotec Energy Innovations, Ltd.
               176 Bronson Avenue
               Ottawa,  Ontario,  Canada  K1R6H4
               (613) 234-3368

     Tne Desired range  of induced pressure differences is from 12.5 Pa  to
75 Pa (0.05 to 0.3 inches of water), in increments of 12.5 Pa.   In some
cases, leakage rate may exceed fan capacity;  nonetheless, a minimum of  five
data points on each side of ?ero is desired.   Each data point consists  of  the
measured pressure difference (Pa) and the corresponding fan flow (m3/hr).
*  The mentioning of trade names and connercial  products  does  not  constitute
   an endorsement.
                                     214

-------
                     Figure B-l.  Blower door "asserr.bly.*
*  Source:  ASTM  E779-81
                                  215

-------
Preferred environmental conditions include winds of 5 mph or le;,s, and indoor-
cutduor temperature contrasts of 11° C or -less to stabilize the environmentally
induced pressure differential.  Winds in exccess of 10 mph are U  be avoided,
and data collection under winds between 4 and 10 mph should be approached
wi th caution.

     All measured flows are converted to standard conditions (101..:! kPa pres-
sure, 21.2° C temperature, 1.202 kg/m^ dir density^ and plotted against cor-
responding pressure differences as shown in Figure B-2.  In this particular
experiment, fan pressurization was applied with the home in normal operating
condition and with major vents sealed.

     ASTM places an estimate of 10 percent or less on the uncertainty at a
given pressure difference for the measurements.  An additional  sidelight of
this method is the opportunity to identify •individual  routes of leakage by
using visual tracers during any tightening procedures.

     The fan pressurization data can be used to determine the effective leakage
area, which acts as a simple index value to facilitate comparisons among
experiments.  Using the approach developed by Sherman and Grimsrud (1980),  the
pressure differential and flow data are fitted to the equation


                               Q   L (AP)n,                               (1)


where Q is the flow (m^/sec), and  P is the pressure difference (Pa).  The
constants L and "i are determined empirically to gain a best fit of the data.
This equation can then be used to calculate the flow at any convenient pressure
difference.  The effective leakage area, Aeff (m2) can then be  calculated from
the expression
                               Aeff = Q V	                        (2;
                                         Y  2 A p
where P is the density of air (1.2 kg/m3).  If the selected pressure difference
is 4 Pa, this expression reduces to


                               A-ff = 0.387 0.4                            (3)


where 0.4 indicates that the flow corresponds to a pressure of 4 Pa.

     The effective leakage area should not be confused with the air  exchange
rate.  Rather, it is an estimate of the aggregate size of the openings through
which infiltration may occur at rates determined by a variety of influences.
                                     216

-------
                      Pressure  (inches H20)


                -0.3  -0.2 -O.I     0    0.1   0.2  0.3
ro
 O
             -90   -60   -30    0     30   6Q__...90


                        Pressure   (pascals)
                                                     XBL 78IO-6630
    Figure B-2. Typical pressures differences measured by the fan pressurization method
    Source:  Grinibrud et al .  1979.
                                 217

-------
     Though not stipulated within the ASTM standard practice, the fan pressur-
ization data can be used to calculate infiltration rates, provided local weather
data are available.  The basis for such calculations is discussed in Sherman
and Grinisruci (J980) and in Blomsterberg and Harrje (1979).

Tracer Gas Dilution
     In this method (ASTM E741-80), a small amount of tracer gas is injected
into the indoor ai>' space and thoroughly mixed.  Within the structure, the
concentration of tracer gas in air decreases over time because exfiltrating
air is removing tracer gas while infiltrating air is essentially free of
tracer gas.  Thus, under ideal circumstances of perfect mixing and steady air
exchange, the decay of tracer gas concentrations will follow the form:
                                C = C
(41
where C is the tracer gas concentration at time t, C0 is the initial tracer
gas concentration, and  i- is the air exchange rate (in air changes per hour,
ACH, units).  The air exchange rate can be calculated directly by rearranging
equation (4) to form
                                                                          [5)
when a succession of data points is obtained, the air exchange rate can be
estimated graphically from a log-linear plot of concentration versus time or
calculated through log-linear regression or finite difference methods to achieve
a best fit.

     In general, a desirable tracer gas has the following characteristics:

     t    It i-3 easily and inexpensively measured at low concentra-
          tions and over short sampling times.

     •    It is not a normal constituent of air, or normally persists
          at concentrations many orders of magnitude below those to be
          used.

     a    The measurement technique is interference-free with regard
          tc normal atmospheric constituents and therniodynamic condi-
          tions.

     9    It is inert, nonpolar, and not absorbed.

     c    It presents no safety or health hazard to occupants or
          operators.
                                     218

-------
As summarized in ASTM E741, no single trac' r ga? satisfies all of these condi-
tions.  However, as long as precautions are taken to ensure that initial  concen-
trations are acceptably low, a number of gases become acceptable.  Recommended
practice is to restrain maximum concentrations to at least a factor of 4  below
accepted limits.  Under no circumstances should initial tracer gas concentra-
tions exceed the OSHA time-weighted average for substances included in the
latest OSHA-controlled list.  This can be accomplished by relatively simple
calculations to guide tracer gas releases.  Sulfur hexafluoride (SF5), nitrous
oxide (^0), carbon dioxide (CP2), and ethane (Col^) are among the most commonly
selected tracer gdses.  Use of these and other tracer gases is discussed  in
Grimsrud et al. (1980) and Harrje et al. (1982).

     The general procedure involves releasing tracer gas at one or more points
in sufficient quantities to produce useful initial concentrations.  The method
of release and quantities involved depend upon considerations of such things
as the internal volume of the structure, the configuration of the air handling
system, and estimates of allowable versus useful concentrations.   In buildings
that have central  air handling systems, releases may be introduced directly to
the intake.  Otherwise, releases can be made from multiple points, and mixed
with fans brought in.  Generally, up to 30 minutes should be allowed for
mi) ing prior to formal sanpl;r,g.

     Tracer gas samples shoulo be taken every few minutes from two or more
widely spaced locations on eacii story.  This can be accomplished by a variety
of methods as outlined in ASTM 1741-80 and in Harrje et al. (1962).

     Additional measurements of winds, temperature and humidity (indoors  ar.j
outdoors), and local  barometric oressure are required.   Because air excharge
rates attributable to infiltration can vary substantially due to changing
environmental conditions, tracer gas dilution tests should be performed under
a variety of environmental  conditions (i.e., wind, temperature, humidity) and.
indoor-outdoor controls if average infiltration is desired.

Longer-Term Average Total Air Exchange (BNL/AIMS)

     The previous  methods represent viable approaches to evaluating the infil-
tration characteristics of a given structure.   However, under realistic condi-
tions extending over periods of many hours or days, infiltration can vary
tremendously in response to a nur,ber of changing variables.  Additionally,  if
the air space is occupied,  total  air exchange is often dominated by periods of
natural ventilation and mechanical  ventilation, and short-term measurements may
prove to be inadequate.

     One solution  to this problem lies in a rather simple device developed at
the Srookhaven National Laboratory (Dietz et ai. 1931,  1982).  The Brcokhaven
air infiltration measurement system (BNL/AIMS)  makes use of a constant source
of tracer gas ac:omnanied by integrated sampling of the tracer.  T^e main
advantage that this approach offers over similar extended procedures (see
                                     219

-------
Condon et al.  1978, for instance) i-s that both the tracer source and sampler
operate on diffusion principles.  Thus, the advantage of compactnes': of
source and sampler at the measurement site is combined with the use of
sophisticated, expensive technology available in the laboratories.

     The DNL/AIMS uses perfluorocarbon tracer (PFT) gases.  These are chemi-
cally and biologically inert.  Typical release rates are 12 to 14 nl/min
at 24° C.  The sampler is a 4 mm i.d. capillary adsorption tube (CAT) that
samp'.js PFTs at a rate equivalent to 0.14 ml/min.  The CAT and PFT diffusion
source are illustrated in Figure B-3.  Sampling may proceed for periods as
short as 1 day, or may be extended over a nu; ,ber of weeks if necessary.
The upper limit has not been firmly established yet.

     The average loss rate of air (i.e., the average outflux, assuming zero PFT
in incoming air) can be approximated by:
                                                                            (6)
                                       'SS
where Rv is the average loss rate  (m-Vmin), Rq is the PFT source strength
(nl/min), and Css is the average concentration (nl/rn^).  Given a reliable
estimate of the internal house volume, the average air exchange rate can be
calculated from
                                        Rv
                                                                           (71
where  v  is the average air exchange rate (ACH~1) and Vn is the house vol
                                                                         ume
     Sampling procedures are
be used for every 500 square
the floor plan to recognize
outside walls to take advant
at least 1.5 m from any PFT
is 8 hours.  This delay coul
would require a return visit
at the proper time.  However
small compared to the total
                             straightforward and simple.   One PFT source should
                             feot of living space;  attention should be paid to
                            a need for added sources.   Sources should be near
                            age of mixing patterns.   Samplers should be located
                            source.*  Recommended mixing  time prior tc sampling
                            d present a problem in logistics because procedure
                             or involvement of a resident to initiate sampling
                            , in situations where this delay period is very
                            sampling period (i.e.,  sample period >_1 week),
   Special precautions must be taken tc avoid undue contamination of samples
   from proximity to sources during storage, shipping, etc., as well.
                                      220

-------
     VsSS
Figure B-3.
Capillary adsorption tube sample
(CATS) on the 'eft PFT diffusion
source on the right.
       221

-------
sources end sanplers can be activated simultaneously without significantly
affecting data.  The samplers are activated by simply removing the cap;
replacing the cap stops sampling.

     The average concentrations are determined in the laboratory by gas
chromatography.  Source release rates are verified through periodic weighings.

ASHRAE Crack Method

     The American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE) offers a method for estimating infiltration rates from
simple measurements that are compared to a series of leakage tables.  The
method is summarized in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals (ASHRAE 1977).
Quantitative application is Timited because, among other tilings, it is
necessary to know the indoor/outdoor pressure difference.  Additionally,
even though ASHRAE provides tables of leakage characteristics for an
extremely wide range of building components, they warn the user that
leakage characteristics for these components as installed or built can
be expected to differ from the as-tested condition.  Hunt (1980) reported
that cverestimation of the pressure differences results in infiltration rates
that range from "plausible" to "too high."

References

ASHRAE.  1977.  ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.  American Society of Heating,
     Refrigerating and Ai r-Condi tioni nq ErTgineers, Inc., Mew York, tl.Y.
     Chapter 21:  "Infiltration and Ventilation."

ASTM.  1980.  Building Air Change Rate and Infiltration Measurements, ASTH
     Special Technical D'jb1ication iio. /19, C.'M. Hunt.'J.C. King, and.H.R.
     frechsel , eds.  American Societv for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia,
     Pa.

ASTM E7A1-80.   1981.  Standard Practice for Measuring Air Leakage by^the
     Tracer Di'ution Method.  American Society for Testing and Materials,
     Phi lade I phi a," Pa.

ASTM E779-81.   1981.  Standard Practice for Measuring Air Leakage by the
     Fan Press'jrization Method.  American Society for Testing and Materials,
     PTfTladelphia, Pa.

Blomsterberg,  A.K., and D.T. Harrje.  1979.  "Approaches to Evaluation
     of Air Infiltration Energy Losses in Buildings,"  ASHRAE Trans. 85(1):
     797-815.

Condon, P.E.,  et al .  1978.  An Automated Control led-FI ow fl'ir Infiltration
     Measurement System.   L B L'rS8T9, L aw r e n c e~~B e r k e 1 ey Lab or a t o ry, Berkeley",
     Calif.
                                     222

-------
Dietz, R.N., et al.   1981.  "An Inexpensive Perfluorocarbon Tracer Technique
     for Wide-Scale Infiltration Measurements in l-'omes."  Presented at the
     Symposium on Indoor Pollution, Health and Energy Conservation.  Archerst,
     Mass. , 1980.

Dietz, R.N., and E.A. Cote.  1982.  Air Infiltration Measurements in a
     Home Using a Convenient Perfluorocarbon Tracer Technique.   B17UTOT97R,
     Brookhaven National Laboratory, Uster, N.Y.

Grimsrud, D.T., et al .   1979.  Infiltration and Air Leakage Comparisons:
     Conventional and Energy-Efficient Housing Designs.   LBL-9157, Lawrence
     Berkeley Laboratory, Berkeley, Calif.

Grimsrud, D.T., il.H. Sherman, J.E. Hanssen, A.M. Pearman,  and D.T. Harrje.
     1980.  "An Intercomparison of Tracer Gases Used for Air Infiltration
     Measurements."  Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory Report Number 8394,  November
     1978; ASHRAE Trans. 86(1):258-67.  American Society of Heating, Refrig-
     erating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.,  Atlanta, Ga.

Harrje, D.T., K. .'iadsby, and G. Linteris.  1982.  "Sampling for Air Exchange
     Rates in a Variety of Buildings."  ASHRAE Trans. 88:1.  American  Society
     of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,  Inc., Atlanta, Ga

Hunt, C.M.  1980.  Air  Infiltration:  A Review of Some Existing Measure-
     ment Technique's and TJa~ta.  ASTM Special Technical  Publication No. 719,
     American Society for TeTting and Materials, Philadelphia,  Pa.

Sherman, M.N., and D.T. Grimsrud.  1980.   Measurement of Infiltration  Using
     Fan Pressurization and Weather Data.  LBL-10852, Lawrence  Berkeley
     Laboratory, Berkeley, Calif.

INHALABLE PARTICIPATE MATTER

     A crucial need for indoor and personal monitoring is  the ability  to
measure not only the mass of inhalable particulate  matter  but also the size
distribution and chemical or elemental makeup.  Sulfates,  nitrates, and a
r.umber of metals such as lead need to be  reliably determined using quiet,
rugged personal monitors.  However, no commercial instruments are available
that meet all of these  requirements.

     Two recently developed sampling systems for size-selective collection
of particulatP matter have been used in personal monitoring and stationary
monitoring approaches.   The first, designed and tested by  the Harvard  Univer-
sity School of Public Health under EPRI sponsorship, uses  a miniature  cyclone
to separate the respirable fraction for filter collection.   The seconds devel-
oped by NBS under EPA sponsorship, collects two si^e fractions--fine (<2.5 pm)
and coarse (>2.5 urn); separate sampling heads allow an upper size limit of 7,
10, or 15 umT  Though not commercially available at this tine,  both systems
can be fabricated from readily available  components and  materials.


                                     223

-------
Harvard/EPRI Personal RSP Sampler

     Design and development of the Harvard/EPRI sampler is summarized in Turner
et al.  (1979a and 1979b).  Principal components of the sampler are displayed
in Figure B-4, and specifications are listed in Table B-l.  Sample air is drawn
through a 10 mm cyclone whose size separation characteristics match criteria
suggested by the American Conference of Governmental  Industrial  Hygienists.
Respirable particles exiting the cyclone are collected on a 37 mm fluoropore
filter (1 urn pore size) housed in a plastic cassette.  Constant flow rate is
achieved through a pump with variable voltage control.  The Brailsford brush-
less pump, identified in the specifications, offj-red  extended operating life
(10,000 hours before servicing) and quiet operation.   The system was configured
to operate from self-contained batteries (14 to 20 hours) or from standard a.c.
line current.  A recharger for the battery pack is included as well.

     Earlier versions of this sampling system were a  straightforward adaptation
cf personal  samplers devised for workplace monitoring, consisting of a Bendix
BOX Super Sampler or a [line Safety Appliance Portable Pjmp, Model  6.  Problems
with excessive noise and relatively short battery life,  as these units wore
originally designed for 8-hour workshift applications, led to the current
approach.

     At the standard flow rate of 1.7 1/min, aerodynamic size characteristics
of the aerosol passing through the cyclone are  as follows:               «

     Aerodynamic Diameter (urn)   2.0   2.5   3.5   5.0   10

     Percent Passable              90    75    50    25     0

Because size separation is inertia!, higher flow rates decrease  the aero-
dynamic cutoff, lower flow rates allow larger particles  to pass  through.
The Harvard/EPRI sampler exercises +0.1 1/mir. control over a flow rate range
of 0.5 to 3.0 1/min.               ~

     Cyclone efficiency is also affected by pulsations induced by pump action.
A 3 cm diameter, 0.8 cm thick, rubber pulsation damper,  installed between the
filter cassette and the pump, allows sampling efficiency to approach that of
a critical-orifice-control 1 ed system.

     Because the nylon cyclone is an insulator, it can accumulate a static
charge that  could significantly affect collection of  charged aerosols.
Blackman and Lippman (1974)  reported higher collection efficiencies of charged
aerosols below 4 urn compared with neutralized aerosols of the same aerodynamic
diameters.

-------
                                r"
                                \i
                                v,
                                                   Djmpe-
                                                O
                                                            -Filler
                                                             - Cyclone
                                   -Flow adi
                                               (- Line volt?1)*
                                     -Vo!ta9e remulating board

                                      and cn^fgmg circuit
                                     J  — Baitery pack
                      Figure  B-4.   Schematic  of  flow  system.


Source:   Turner  et al.  1979a  and  1979b.
                                           225

-------
            TABLE B-l.  SPECIFICATIONS OF HARVARD/EPRI SAMPLER
Size:

Weight:

Pump:

Battery pack:

Flow control:

Range of
operation:

Case metal :

Cyclonic
separator:

Features:
15.2 x 15.2 x 7.6 cm

1.8 kg

Brailsford Brushless TD-3LL or TD-3L

Gould 12 V/1.2 SC cells Ni-Cd

Variable constant voltage


0.5 to 3.0 1pm

Alumi num


10-mm nylon with filter

b  Self-containea battery charger

•  No warmup time required to reach stable flow

o  14- to 20-hour sample time on battery mode,  indefinite
   from line voltage

a  Minimum maintenance brushless pump (10,000 hours before
   service)

•  Quiet operation
Source:  Turner et al. 1979a and 1979b.
                                     226

-------
NBS-EPA Portable Ambient Particulate Sampler

     A size-selective portable participate monitor was developed by NIBS
under EPA sponsorship.  Because the EPA was planning planning on changing its
participate standard to one involving two size fractions (fine and coarse)  of
inhalable particulates, a sampler capable of collecting both size fractions
for later chemical analysis was required.  The design and development of the
NBS-EPA Portable Ambient Particulate Sampler is summarized in HcKenzie et al.
(1981) and in Bright and Fletcher (1983).  Principal components of the sampler
are shown in Figure B-5; specifications are listed in Table B-2.  Sample air is
drawn through a specially designed inlet where particles greater than the desired
upper size limit  (7, 10, or 15 urn) are removed.  A Nucleopore filter (37 mm,
8 pm pore size), coated with Apiezon L grease to retard particle bounce, collects
the coarse fraction (>2.5 pm), passing the fine fraction (<2.5pm) for collection
lection onto a PFTE fTlter (37 mm, Turn pore size).   Constant sample flow of
6 1/min is supplied by a commercially available pump (Bendix BOX series)
operating off batteries.  The system fits into a 10 x 10 x 18 cm commercially
available case.

     The only noncommercial item in the system is the size selective inlet.
However, the inlet can be easily fabricated on a standard lathe (Fletcher
1982).  Figure B-6 indicates critical dimensions for the standard sleeve and
inserts for the three cut points.  The original system used aluminum for the
inlet, though other materials are suitable.

     Preliminary tests have shown no observed reductions in flow rate for fine
filter loadings up to 100 urn; flow decreased by 7 and 12 percent at loadings
of 220 and 400 ym, respectively (Fletcher and Bright 1982).  These tests were
performed in a room laden with cigarette smoke and required several  consecutive
days of sampling before flow reduction was observed.

     Wind tunnel tests indicate that collection efficiency is independent
of wind direction and wind speed at wind velocities below 0.9 ni/sec.  At
higher wind velocities, collection efficiency decreases for larger particles.
For exanple, less than 20 percent of 15  m particles were collected at
2.4 m/sec, regardless of orientation.  For intermediate-sized particles,
collection efficiency was 75 to 100 percent with a slight orientation effect
(Fletcher and Bright 1982).  The sampler should perform adequately in indoor
settings, provided it is located in a draft-free area.   In personal  monitor-
ing situations in/olving outdoor microenvironments and in fixed sampling
outdoors, adjustments for altered collection efficiency due to winds may be
warranted for the coarse fraction.
                                     221

-------
           Coarse
            Filter
             Fine
            Filter
                        Impactcr
                            Air-Tight Case
             J
            Motor-Pump
Mufflers
               Air F!ov,
           Fi'oure B-5.  Schonntij diapram of the sampler.
                                                    Exhaust
Source:   Fletcher and Bright D82.
                               228

-------
           TABLE B-2.  SPECIFICATIONS OF NBS PORTABLE AMBIENT
                          PARTICIPATE SAMPLER
Size:

Wei ght:

Pump:

Battery pack:

Flow Control:

Range of
Operation:

Size
Separation:


Battery Life:

Features:
10 x 10 x 18 cm

1.6 kg

Bendix (BDX 35, BOX 55, or BOX  60),  or GILIAN

Gould Ni-Cd

+10 percent


5.5 to 6.5 1/min
Fine fraction (<2.5um),  coarse  fraction  (^_2.5uir
upper limit cut points available at 7,  10,"15 pin.

Up to 60 hours

Two cut points with a variable upper limit  allow
matching with future EPA  standard for inhalable
oarticulates
Source:  Fletcher and Bright 1982.
                                     229

-------
                                          Inlet Slit
                                          •Oil Soaked FRIT
                                           Impaction Surface
                                            0-Ring Fitting
                                            to Filter Casette
              Critical Dimensions  for Funnel  Inserts

              Cut Point (um)       A (cm)     LJflil
                    15            3.696      2.372
                    10            3.863      2.568
                    7            3.871      2.G75

          Figure [3-6.  Cross-section of the inlet to scale
[full length  = 9.5 cm, 15 gm inseri  shown; critical diu^sions in cm)

:e:  Fletcher and Bright 1982-
                              230

-------
Inorganic Analysis of Participate Matter Samples

     The inorganic constituents of participate matter that are of interest
to indoor air quality studies incluJe sulfates and nitrates and a number of
meta"ls.  Among the metals, principal  interest has focused on lead, though all
metallic and semi metal lie elements may be of interest.  As with organic
aerosols (see page 232 of this appendix), inorganic material is usually
collected in conjunction with standard gravimetric sampling for inhalable
participate matter.  Constituents of interest may be extracted for quantita-
tion, or the sample matrix may be submitted directly to nondestructive
testing.

     For any given constituent, a wide variety of standard methods and tested
procedures are available.  Extensive summaries are to be found in Katz (1980
and 1977).  These range from relatively simple approaches involving
extraction and spectrophotometric determination (as for sulfates and nitrates)
to the more elaborate approaches of atomic absorption spectroscopy, neutron
activation analysis, proton-induced X-ray emission (PIXE), and X-ray fluores-
cence (as for metals).

     It should be noted that in many cases, methods for inorganic constituents
were developed initially for source testing and for high-volume sampling.
Uith the smaller sample masses that are generally captured with size selection
and particularly with personal monitors for particulate matter, attention
should be given to the mariner in which analytical  performance interacts with
sample mass.  That is, detection limits of the analytical method rrust
correspond to acceptably low concentrations.

References

Blackman, M.W., and M. Lippman.  1974.  "Performance Characteristics of the
     Multicyclone Aerosol Sampler."  Am. Ind. Hyg. Assoc. J. 35:311-16.

Bright, D.S., and R.A. Fletcher.  1983.  "New Portable Ambient Aerosol  Sampler."
   " Am. Ind. Hyg. Assoc, J. 44(7):528-36.

Fletcher, R.A., and D.S. Bright.  1982.  "NBS Portable Ambient Partiru'iate
     Sampler."  NBS Report under Interagency Agreement No. AD-13-F-0-034-0,
     Office of Monitoring and Technical Support, Office of Research and
     Development, U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency, Washington, D.C.

Fletcher, R.A.  1982.  Center for Analytical Chemistry, National Bureau
     of Standards, personal communications July 1982.

Katz, M.  1980.  "Advances in the Analysis of Air Contaminants:  A Critical
     Review."  J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc. 30:5:528-57.

Katz, M., ed.  1977-  Methods of Air Sampling and Analysis.  2d ed.  American
     Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
                                     231

-------
McKenzie, R.L., U.S. Bright, B.C. Cadoff, R.A. Fletcher, and J.A.  Hodgeson.
     1981.  "Development and Characterization of Personal  Samplers for
     Participate and Gases."  Presented at the Symposium on Indoor Pollution,
     Health and Energy Conservation, Amherst, Mass.

Turner, W.A. , J.O. Spengler, D.W. Dockery, and C..D. Colome.  1979a.
     "Design and Performance of a Reliable Personal Monitoring System for
     Respirable Particulates."  J. /Mr Pollut. Control_ Ascoc.  29(7) :747-49.

Turner, W.A., J.D. Spengler, D.W. Dockery. and S.D. Colome.  197?b.
     "Design and Performance of a Reliable Personal Monitoring System for
     Respirable Particulates."  Proceedings of the Workshop on the Development
     and Usage of Personal Exposure Monitors for Exposure  and  Health  Effects
     Studies, Chapel Hill, H.C.

ORGANIC POLLUTANTS

     Relatively limited work has been carried out to characterize  organic
pollutants in the indcor environment.  It is a highly complex  topic  and  the
list of airborne organic compounds of interest is large.  Their presence has
been attributed to combustion, to the use of solvents or solvent-containing
products, and to emanations from Pianufactured materials (see,  for  instance,
EPA 1981 and MAS 1981).

     The majority of the monitoring approaches involve  selectively concen-
trating target compounds on a collector, such as sorbent bed or filter,  and
transferring the sample to the laboratory for analysis.  Continuing  advances
in analytical  methods such as chrumatography and mass spectrometry permit
reliable detection and speciation from submicrugram quantities on  a  routine
basis.

     Comprehensive reviews of methods that may be adapted  to indoor  settings
are to be found in Lamb et dl. (1980) and in Katz (1980).   Organic pollutants
are classified into three broad classes as follows:

     9    Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC)--relatively  low molecular
          weight species that exist in the vapor phase  under ordinary
          ambient conditions.
          tetrachloride.
Examples include  benzene  and  carbon
          Semivolatile Organic Compounds (SVOC)—less volatile
          species such as PCBs and pesticides.

          Organic Aerosols — higher weight molecjlar species that
          usually exist in the liquid or solid phase under ordinary
          conditions.  Examples include a wide range of polynuclear
          aromatic hydrocarbons condensed onto particulate matter.
                                     232

-------
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC)

     VOCs are ordinarily collected by drawing sample air through a sorbent
bed that traps and retains target compounds.  The VOCs of interest are later
desorbed in the laboratory and quantitated.  Sampling trains can be configured
to meet the needs of monitoring strategies requiring personal monitoring,
indoor fixed monitoring, or outdoor fixed monitoring.

     A number of solid sorbents are available; Table B-3 summarizes selected
sorbents and their properties.  Use of Tcnax--CC and activated charcoal,  with
gla^s or stainless steel tubes to house the sorbent material and constrain
sample flow through the bed, has been particularly widespread.  Captured
material may be desorbed using solvent elution, end an aliquot may be injected
into a gas chromatograph for quantitation.  Solvent eljtion, however, oartially
offsets the advantages of sorbent trapping by rediluting the sorbent-concentrated
sample.

     In addition to its high collection efficiency, the particular advantage
that Tenax offers is the thermal stability to allow desorption at high tenper-
atui"es (up to 3&0° C).  Charcoal has so far shown questionable utility in  this
regard (see Table B-3).

     Breakthrough and  inherent limits of detection of the analytical  system
(i.e., CC, GC/I1S, etc.) are of central importance in considering the  use of
solid sorbants in sampling VOCs.  Breakthrough refer; to saturation capacity
of the sorbent ^ed so  that eluti&n occurs during sampling,  and subsequent
quantitation could severely underestimate concentrations.  Breakthrougn
volume (i.e., the volume of air sampled beyond which more than 50 percent  of a
particular target compound entering the front of the sampling cartridge  is lost
at the rear) is a useful concept in determining optimum sample volumes and the
size of a sorbent bed  needed to meet the detection limit of the analytical
system.  Table B-4 summarizes breakthrough volumes (liters) determined by
Fellizzari el al . (1981) to guide sampling procedures for VOCs in the Total
Exposure Assessment Methodology (TEAM) Study.  In their approach a total sample
volume of 0.025 m^ (25 1) was selected to stay below the breakthrough volumes
of most target compounds.

     Once sample volume and sorbant quantities have been determined,  glass
or stainless steel collector tubes can be configured.  The inlet and  outlet
are usually plumed with glass wool to provide support.  Extreme care must
be exercised in all handling of the sorbant to preclude contamination.  'Jsual
precautions include extended Soxhlet extraction of virgin and reused  Tenax,
followed by vacuum drying at 100° C.  Mesh sorting and tube packing are  per-
formed under clean room conditions.  Storage and handling when not actively
sampling should be through the use of clean, sealed containers.

     A numbor cf vacuum sources exist to allow configurations for personal
and fixed sampling over desired time periods (see Wallace and Ott 1982).
                                     233

-------
                                                   TABLE  B-3.   PROPERTIES  OF  SELECTED ADSORBENTS
Temp.
limit
Adsorbent (°C)
Tenax-GC 100
(.15/60 mesh)





Porapak R 250
(50/80 mesh)








Porapak N 190
(50/80 mesh)





AThersorb 400
XE-340





SK.C Acti- 400
va ted
Charcoal



'Pressure drop across
'Estimated.
Cond. Des.
temp. temp. Chemical
(°C) CC) composition
320 300 2,6-Diphenyl-
p-pheny 1 ene
oxide




235 150- n-Vlnyl
220 pyri-olldone








175 150 n-Ylnyl
pyrrol (done





320 300 Carbonized
styrene-
dl vi nyl
benzene



320 300 Carbonized
orgamcs




tapered tubes containing 1 .0 g of

Major thermal
dccornposi tlon
products
Alkyl benzene
St^rene
Benzene
Alkyl
phenol s


Vinyl pyr-
rol f done
Pyrrol 1 done
,'1yrr1H-
di ene





Vinyl pyr-
rol 1 done
Pyrrol Idone
Pyrrllidlene



None observed
(after condi-
tioning ,1 1
350" C and
observing on
GC/MS)

IJone
observed




adsorbent at a


Background Ap*
level (pslg)
Good 160
(none detected
above system
background)



After condition- — 1.1*
ino at 235° C,
background upon
desorblng Is
Poor at 220° C
(well above sys-
tem background) ;
Fair at 150" C
(slightly above
system oackground)
Poor 1.1
(well above
system back-
ground )



Good 0.6
(none detected
above system
background)



Good -0.6*
(none detected
above system
background)


3 1/min fl"w rate.



Capacity
Should efficiently
trap Intermediately
(and less) volatile
compounds with
slightly less affln-
1 ty for polar com-
pounds .
Should efficiently
trap Intermediately
(and less) volatile
compounds wi th
slightly great r
affinity for polar
compounds.



Should efficiently
trap Intermediately
(and less) volatile
compounds wi th
slightly greater
affinity for polar
compounds.
Should efficiently
trap highly (and
all less) volatile
compounds with
slightly greater
affinity for polar
compounds.
Should efficiently
trap hlqhly (and all
less) volatile com-
pounds with much
greater affinity
for polar compounds




Desurpti on
Very amenable to
thermal desorp-
tion for inter-
mediately (and all
higher) volatile
compounds .

Very amerable to
thermal desorption
for Intermediately
(and all hiqhcr)
volatile compounds.





Very amenable to
thermal desorption
for intermediately
(and al 1 higher)
volatile compounds.


Questionable
amenabi 1 1 ty to
thenn-il desorption
for al 1 but highly
volatile hydro-
carbons.

Questionable
amenabi 1 i ty to
thermal desorption
fr" ^11 but highly
volatile hydro-
caroons.


Pange of
uti 1 1 tv
Urn)
~95U->?POO






-750—1500









-750—1500






-450—750






-350— fTO







fource:   Brooks  et al.  1979.

-------
     TABLE B-4.  TENAX GC I3RFAKTHROUGH VOLUMES (LITERS) FOR TARGET COMPOUNDS*
Compound
Choi oroform
Carbon tetrachloride
1,2-Dichloroethane
1,1 ,1-Trichl o^oe thane
Tetrachl oroethyl ene
Tri chl oroethyl ene
Chlorobenzene
boil i ng
point (nC)
61
77
83
75
121
87
132
Temperature (°F)
50
56
45
71
31
481
120
1989
60
41
36
55
24
356
89
871
70
32
28
41
20
261
67
631
80
24
21
31
16
192
51
459
90
17
17
24
12
141
37
332
100
13
13
19
9
104
28
241
 Source:  Pellizzari et al. 1981.



*iror a Tenax GC bed of 1.5 cm i.d. x 8-0 cm.
                                    235

-------
Semi volatile Organic Compounds (SVOC)

     SVOCs--particularly pol «chl orinai.ed biphenyls and pesticides—are Generally
sampled by drawing sample air through polyurethane foam (called PUF or PRWI),
Target compounds are subsequently extracted in the laboratory and analysed.

     Lewis and MacLeod (1982) have developed an approach that is adaptable
to personal monitoring as well as fixed sampling.   Cylindrical  PUF plugs
(22 mir, diameter x 7.6 cm) are cut from sheet stock open cell  polyethe*" type
polyurethane foam (0.022 g/cm3) that is ordinarily used for upholstery.
Cylindrical cuts are facilitated by a stainless steel  cutting dye.  Prepara-
tion requires extended Soxhlet extraction.  Plugs  are  inserted  into a boro-
silicate glass tube (20 mm i.d. x 8 cN, one end of which is  drawn down  to a
7 mm o.d. open connection to allow attachment of a vacuum line.

     Sample cartridges should be protected from contain nation by wrapping  in
hexane-washed aluminum foil.  Nominal sample volumes may be as  high as 3 m^
(i.e., 4 1/min for 12 hours, for instance).  PUF plugs are removed from  the
cartridges in the laboratory, target compounds are extracted  with a Soxhlet
extractor using diethylether in hexane, and quantisation may  be carried  out
using GC or higi performance liquid chromatography (HPLC).  Compounds of
interest can be measured at levels as low as 1 ng/m^.

     Table B-5 indicates the range of compounds that can be sampled with
this system.  Sampling can be extended to include  VCCs as well  as fortifying
collection efficiency for some SVOCs by inserting  a Tenax sandwich between
two shortened DUF plugs in a single cartridge.

Organic Aerosols
     In i.iany c&ses, sampling for organic aerosols is done in conjunction with
standard gravimetric sampling (i.e., as for inhalable particulate matter).
Attention in tnis area has focused largely on polynuclear aromatics (PNiA),
which represent ubiquitous combustion products that have demonstrated animal
carcinogenicity.

     Once extracted from the filter by an appropriate solvent, PNAs may be
quantified (as a class or as individual compounds) by a variety of methods
including routine GC, HPLC, and thin layer chromatography (TLC) (see Katz 198C)

     Spectroscopic techniques are also coming into use.  In particular,
room-temperature phosphorescence (RTP) soectroscopy has overcome the need for
cryogenic treatment (Vo-Dinh et al. 1981).  In this method, PNAs are isolated
by liquid chronatography and diluted in ethanol.   A 3 ul aliquot is spotted
onto a filter previously treated with a solution of heavy metal salts,
and irradiated with ultraviolet light.  Resulting phosphorescence is enhanced
by the heavy metals and can be compared to reference spectra levels to
identify and quantify PlIAs.
                                     236

-------
                        TAKE R-5.   COLLECTION  EFFICIENCIES

Compound
Organochlorine pesticides
a-Hexachloracyclohexane
T-Hexachlorocyclohexane (li
Technical chlordane
p.p'-DDT
P,p'-DDE
Mi rex
2,4-0 Estors:
Isopropyl
Butyl
Isobutyl
Isooctyl
Semi volatile organochiorine
1 ,2 ,3-Trichl orobenzene
1 , 2, 3, 4-Te tree hi orobenzene
Pentachl orobenzene
Hexachl orobenzene
Hexachlorocyclopentadiene
2,4,5-Trichlorophenol
Pentachlorophenol
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor 1254
Aroclor 1260
Organophosphorus pesticides
Dichlorvos (DDVP)
Ronnel
Chlorpyri fos
Diazinon
Methyl parathior.
Ethyl parathion
Mai athion
Quantity
introduced,
M9

0.005
ndane) 0.05-1.0
0.2
0.6, 1.2
0.2, 0.4
0.6, 1.2

0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
compounds and PCB
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.5, 1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.1
0.1
0.1

0.2
0.2
0.2
1.0
0.6
0.3
0.3
Air
vol ume
m3

0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9

3.6
3.6
3.6
3.6

0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9

0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
Collection efficiency
x, %

115
91.5
84.0
97.5
102
85.9

92.0
82.0
79.0
>CC*

6.6*
62.3-
94.0
94.5
8.3*
108
107
96.0
95.0
109

72.0
106
108
84.0
80.0
75 9
100§
RSD, -.

3
8
11
21
11
22

5
10
20
20

22
33
12
8
12
3
16
15
7
j

13
8
9
18
19
15
'=, n

6
5
8
12
12
7

12
11
12
12

8
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
11

2
12
12
18
18
18
* Not vaporized.  Value based on % retention efficiency  of  81.0  (RSD    10%, n   6).
# % Collection efficiencies were 98%,  98%,  and 97?  (n  =  2),  respectively, for these
  three compounds by the PUF/Tenax GC  "sandwich"  trap.
§ Decomposed in generator; value leased on I retention  efficiency  of 1C1"
    (RSD   7%, n   4).

Sourre:  Lewis and MacLeod 1982.

Legend:
  x   average collection efficiency, in percent
RSD = relative standard deviation, in  percent
  n = nuniber of trials

-------
     It should be noted that in many cases analytical methods for PNAs
were initially developed for source testing and for high volume ambient
sampling.  With the smaller sample masses that are generally captured with
size selection and particularly with personal monitors for particulate
matter, attention should be given to the manner in which analytical  perfor-
mance interacts with sample mass.  For example, detection of nanogram
quantities may well force collection volumes beyond the flow capacity of the
sampler.  Or worse still, a short sampling period coupled to a large sample
volume could severely alter air flow patterns in some indoor settings.  In
many cases, compensation can be forced by reducing the extraction volume,
or by pooling replicate samples for composite analysis.

References

Brooks, J.J., et al .  1979.  "A Combination Sorbant System for Broe.d Range
     Organic Sampling in Air."  In Proceedings of the Symposium on the
     Development and Usage of PersonTl Monitors for Exp'osure and Health
     Studies.  EPA-6Q019-79-032".  OTSTTnv frorfmenteTT 'ProtectiorTAgency,
     Research Triangle Park, N.C.

EPA.  1981.  Workshop on Indoor Air Quality Research Needs.  Interagency
     Research Group on Indoor Air Quality, U.S. Environmental Protection
     Agency, Washington. D.C.

Lamb, S.I., et al .  1980.  "Organic Coiipounds in Urban Atmospheres:   A
     Review of Distribution, Collection and Analysis."  J. Air Pollut.
     Control Assoc. 30(10):1098-1115.                       ~~

Lewis, R.G., and K.E. MacLeod.  1982.  "Portable Sampler for Pesticides
     and Semivolative Industrial Organic Chemicals in Air."  Anal. Chem.
     54-310-15.

National Research Council, Committee on Indoor Pollutrnt.s.  1981.   Indoor
     Pol 1utants.  National Academy Press, Washington, D.C.

Pellizzari, E.D., et al .  1981.  "Total Exposure Assessment Methodology
     (TEAM) Study:  Phase II Work Plan.'1  RTI/2190/00-01S, Research Triangle
     Institute, Research Triangle Park, N.C.

Vo-Dinh, T.. R.B. Gamaft, and P.R. Martinez.  1981.  "Analysis of a Workplace
     Air Particulate Sample by  Synchronous Luminescence and Room-Temperature
     Phosphorescence."  Anal. Chem. 53:253-58.

Wallace, L.A. and H.R. Ott.  1982.  "Personal Monitors:  A State-of-the-
     Art Survey."  J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc. 32:601-10.
                                      238

-------
FORMALDEHYDE

     The most popular methods for measuring indoor formaldehyde concentra-
tions employ aqueo-is bubblers for air sampling followed by colorimetric
analysis.  In applying these methods, two bubblers in series,  operating  under
vacuum, are recommended.  The collection efficiency of one bubbler is  approxi-
mately 80 percent; the second bjbbler boosts the total  collection  efficiency
to approximately 95 percent.  The contents of each bubbler may be  analyzed
separately or the contents may be pooled.  Additionally, sampling  frequently
takes place wi^h the bubblers chilled.  Under these conditions, a  vapor  trap
(simply an empty bubbler) should be installed betweei, the second bubbler and
the pump.

Chromotropic Acid Method

     Detailed procedures for the Chromotropic Acid Method may  be found
in NIOSH PSCAI1 125 (NIOSH 1977).  Sample air is bubbled through a  1  percent
sodium bisulfate solution.  In the laboratory, Chromotropic acid reagent is
added to an aliquot of the absorbing solution.  Concentrated sulfuric  acid is
added slowly to the absorbing solution,  to avoid spattering due to the
exotheTiic reaction.  The treated aliquot is allowed to cool  to room temper-
ature.  Ahsorbance is read at 580 nn .in  a spectrophotoneter.   Formaldehyde
content is determined from a curve derived from fresh standard formaldehyde
solutions.

     Concentrations as low as 0.1 ppm can be determined in a  25 liter  air
sample (based on 20 ml of absorbing solution and a difference  of 0.05  absor-
bance units above blank).  Sensitivity can be boosted by increasing  the
sample air volume (i.e. extending me samp'i o period or  increasing  the  flow
rate) or by decreasing the amount of absorbing solution in the bubblers.
Godish (1981) recommends a sample flow rate of 1 liter  per minute, a
90-minute sample period and 10 ml absorbing reagent in  each impinger.

Modified Pararosaniline Method

     Detailed procedures for the Modified Pararosaniline Method may  be found
in Miksch et al . (1981).  Sample air is  oubbled througn deionized, distilled
water that is kept chilled (i.e., ice bath or refrigerator) djring sampling.
In t!ie laboratory, acidified pararosanil ine is added to an aliquot of  the
sample solution, and thoroughly mixed.  Then, sodium sulfite reagent added and
thorougly mixed.  The treated aliouot is placed in a 25° C water bath  and color
development is allowed 60 minutes.  Absorbance is read  at 570  nm in  a  spectro-
photometer.  Formaldehyde content is determined from a  curve derived from
fresh standard solutions.

     Concentrations as low as 0.025 ppm  can be determined in a 60-liter
air sarple (based on 20 ml of absorbing  solution and a  difference  of
0.05 absorbance units above blank).
                                     219

-------
Additional Formaldehyde Methods

     A visual colorimetric screening method based on the methylbenzothiazolin
(HF5TH) technique has been reported by Matthews and Hovve'M  (1981a).   This
method is specific for all aliphatic aldehyoes, but in domestic  indoor air
settings, formaldehyde is expected to be the principal contributor.   Sampling
is carried out using a passive semi permeable; membrane device with water as an
absorbant.  When the color change is fully developed, the solution is compared
to a reference color chart to determine concentration range.

     Formal delude concentrations may also be determined by collection onto
various solid sorbants followed by laboratory analysis.  Beasley et al. (1980)
suggest collection onto silica gel coated with 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine
(2,4-DNPH).  During sampling, formaldehyde forms a specific hydrazone which
is extracted using acetonitrile and quantified by HPLC with UV detection.

     Matthews et al. (1981b) have developed a simple approach using 13x
molecular sieve collection followed by water-rinse desorption and colorimetric
analysis based on the Modified Pararosaniline Method.  This ppproach has  been
tested for passive sampling as well as pumped sampling, and has  shown high
collection efficiencies (>99.9 percent) and stability (shelf life of sealed
exposed media at <38° C is at least 1 week).  Care nust be exercised in
applying this technioue, however, because the sorbant also has an affinity for
water; one study is limiting sampling to 2 liters per minute for 30 minutes
(Battelle 1982).  nonetheless, a lower detection limit of 0-025  ppm is to
be expected.

References

Battelle.  1982.  "Quality Assurance Project Plan for Control Technology
     Assessment and Exposure Profile for Workers Exposed to Hazards in
     the Electronic Components Industry."  U.S. Environmental Protection
     Agency Contract Number 6a-03-3026, Battelle Columbus Laboratories,
     Columbus, Ohio.

Beasley, R.K., C.E. Hoffman, M.L. Rueppel , and J.W. Warley.  1980.  "Sampling
     Formaldehyde in Air With Coated Solid Sorbent and Determination by High
     Performance Liquid Chromatography."  Anal. Chem. 52(7):1110-14.

Godish, T.  1981.  "Formaldehyde and Bull dingr,--Rel ated Illness." J. Environ.
     Health 44(3):116-21.

Mdtthevs, T.G., and T.C. Howell.  1981a.  "Visual Colorimetric Formaldehyde
     Screenino Analysis for Indoor Air."  J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc.
     31(11) :1181-84.

-------
Matthews, T.G., T.C. Howell, and A.R. Hawthorne.  1981b.   "Practical  Measure-
     ment Technology for Low Formaldehyde Concentration Levels:   Applications
     to Personnel  Monitoring Needs."  Presented at the National  Symposium on
     Monitoring Hazardous Organic Pollutants in Air, Raliegh,  N.C.,  Hay 1981.
     (Research was sponsored jointly by the Consumer Product Safety  Commission
     under Interagency Agreement 79-1558 and the Office of Health and Environ-
     mental Research, U.S. Department of Energy, under Contract  Number
     W-7405-eng-26 with the Union Carbide Corporation.)

Miksch, R.R , D.W. Anthon, L.Z. Fanning, C.D. Hollowell,  K.  Revzan,  and
     J. Clanville.  1981.  "Modified Pararosaniline Method for the Determination
     of Formaldehyde in Air."  Anal. Chem. 53:2118-23.

NIOSH.  1977.  NIOSH Manual of Analytical  Methods.  2d ed.,  Vol.  1.   U.S.
     Department~of Health, Education, and Uelfare, Cincinnati, Ohio.

RADOU

     Using commercially available passive devices, average indoor radon
concentrations can be measured over periods of several months  using  the Track
Etch™ Method  (Alter and Fleischer 1981) or over periods of a few  weeks
using thermoluminescent dosimetry (George and Breslin 1977).  For shorter
periods (i.e., on the order of a few days), no commercially  available passive
devices were-  identified.  George (1982/, however, has recently reported a
passive method based on activated carbon adsorption and gamma  ray detection
that is inexpensive, maintenance free, and can be easily  fabricated  from
commercially  available components.  Jhe activated carbon  canister method
exhibits a lower limit of detection for radon of 0.2 nCiM~3  for  an exposure
period of 72  hours.

     The device, originally based on the Mil Canister developed  by the
U.S. Army Chemical Corps in Uorld War II, is a cylindrical container 5 cm high
by 10 cm diameter, which 'is filled with 200 g of coconut shell carbon (i.e.,  to
a depth cf 4.5 cm).  A metal screen and retainer a ring hold the  activated
carbon in place.  The canister is fitted with a removable metal  cover taped
in place to provide an air-tight seal when not sampling.

     To sample, the-metal cover ft;  simply removed in the area  to  be  monitored
and resealed  at the end of the sampling period.  The amount of sorbed radon
in the carbon bed is determined by measuring the gamma rays  produced by the
decay of radon progeny.  George used an 8 x 8 cm crystal  coupled  to  e
compact pulse height analyzer and printer.  Total gamma activity  from the
radon prooeny decay is determined from the total absorption  peaks of
214Pb(0.242,  0.294, and 0.352 MeV)  and of 214Bi(p.609 MeV).   Average
radon concentration may be calculated from the following equation:


                                  net CPM
                       Rn	
                              E x Ts x DF x CF
                                     241

-------
          Rn = Average radon concentration during exposure (nCii-1~3)

     net CPM = Ganma counts per minute minus background

           E = Calibration factor for gamma analyzer (CPM/nCi)

          Ts = Exposure period in minutes, winch generally should not
               exceed 5,500 minutes (3.82 days — the half life of radon)

          DF = Decay factor for radon from midpoint of exposure until
               time of counting

          CF = Calibration factor for canister (nCi min~l/nCiM~3).

     Calibration tests showed no discernible differences in response for tem-
peratures ranging from 18° C to 27° C.  Response of the device does, however,
decrease with exposure time and h'imidity.  Figure B-7 illustrates this effect.
The middle curve (RH = 40°i to 70%) rep. esents conditions most often encountered
indoors.  Corrections for humidity can be made by determining the amount of
water sorbed during exposure gravimetrical ly and applying a second  calibration
curve (See Figure B-8).

     These devices ?re reuseoble.  Before sampling, residual  radon  (a.id sorbed
water) can be purged with heated air (100° C for 5 minutes) or by baking in an
oven at 120° C for several hours.  Exposed canisters can be counted up to
10 days after the end of exposure, thus allcwing the devices  to be  transferred
by mail.  Exposure periods should not exceed 3 to 4 days.

References

Alter, H.W., and R. L. Fleischer.  1981.  "Passive Integrating Radon Mor'tor
     for Environmental Monitoring."  Health Phys. 40:693.

George, A.C., and A.J. Breslin.  197;.  "Measurement of Environmental Radon
     with Integrating Instruments."  Workshop on Methods for  Measuring
     Radiation in and Around Uranium Kills.  3(9).  E.D. Howard, ed.  Atomic
     Industrial Forum, Inc., Washington, D.C.

George, A.C.  1982.  "Passive, Integrated Measurement of Indoor Radon Using
     Activated Carbon."  Environmental Measurements Laboratory, U.S. Department
     of Energy, New York, N.Y. (submitted to Health Phys. ).

-------
V

   .12
   .10
  .08
   -06
cS
85.02
     0
      0
                                           Rl-l = 15-25%

                                           RH =40-70%
                                        O RH  = 100%
20
00
                          40        60        80

                              EXPOSURE,MRS

         Figure B-7.  Variation of radon adsorption versus time at different humidities.

Source:  George 1982.
20

-------
   24
   20
p  l2
*JJ
    8
    4
    0
      0
\0
       RELATIVE HUMIDITY, %
      O  =  100
       X  =  72
      A  =  50-55
      D  =' 40
20      30      40      50     GO
                 EXPOSURE, MRS
70
00
Source:  George  1982.
                 Figure B-8.  Water adsorption versus time at different humidities.
00
100

-------
 FIBROUS AEROSOLS

     Airborne  fibers of  interest  in indoor air quality monitoring include all
 var.eties. of asbestos; a number of manufactured fibers such ?s mineral wools,
 fibrous glass  wool, and  some ceramics; and organic fibers such as animal, dander
 and wood dusts  (EPA 1981).  Manual sampling for fibrous aerosols generally
 consists of drawing sample air through a membrane filter and quantifying fiber-
 concentrations  through optical microscopy or,  when resources permit, analyzing
 the sample by  sophisticated analytical procedures such as electron microscopy
 and X-ray diffraction.

 Optical Microscr>py

     Detailed procedures for determining exposure to airborne asbestos fibers
 though filter collection and optical  sizing and counting are available in
 NIOSH P&CAM 239 (NIOSH 1977).   In this method,  asbestos fibers are defined
 as particles of physical  dimension greater than 5 urn with a length to diameter
 ratio of 3  to 1 or greater.   It should be noted that the method is not asbestos-
 specific.   Rather, the method  assesses all  fibers that meet the dimensional-
 requirements.  Further, the  resolution limits  of optical  microscopy along with
 the assigned cutoff of 5  urn  precludes  assessing fibers that fall  below this size
 range.   Thus, the method provides an  index of  asbestos exposure rather than a
 true measure of asbestos  fiber counts.

     Sampling is usually  carried  out  using a 34 mm membrane filter with 0.8 urn
 pore size  mounted in an open-faced cassette.   Sample flow is selected upon
 consideration of desired  sampling period and minimum detection limits.  For
 personal monitoring applications,  a number of  battery-powered pumps with stable
 flow rate  control  are available.

     At the end of sampling, exposed  filters are resealed in their cassettes
 and tak^n  to the laboratory.   In  the  laboratory,  the filters are  sectioned,
mounted onto microscope slides,  and chemically  treated to make the membrane
 filter transparent.  The  slides  are then examined using phase contrast illu-
mination at a magnification  of 400 X  to 500 X  to acquire  a statistically valid
count of fibers that meet the  sizing criteria.

     Though NIOSH indicates  chat  the experience level  of  the analyst performing
the fiber  count does not  significantly contribute  to variations.   Novice or
untutored  fiber counters  who work  only from published instructions often
obtain  fiber counts that  are as  little as half  of  those obtained  by experienced
fiber counters.  Therefore,  it is  strongly  recommended that formal  training be
a pert  of  the operation.  • Introductory and  continuing training programs are
offered by  a  number of organizations;  published notices frequently appear in
the professional  literature  (i.e., the Journal  of  the Air Pollution Control
Association and the American Industrial  Hygiene Association Journal).
                                     245

-------